LIBRARY
OF THK
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA.
Deceived
Accessions Noj~ru? Class No.
and Synonyraes. (Just published.)
-- Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War, with
Notes, Dictionary, Life of Caesar, Map of Gaul, Plans of Bat-
tles, etc.
-- Cicero's Select Orations, with Notes, etc.
Arnold's First and Second Latin Book and Practical Gram-
mar.* Revised and corrected. By J. A. SPENCEK, D. D. 12mo.
359 pages.
--- Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composi-
tion.* Revised and corrected. By J. A. SPENCER, D.D. 12mo.
356 pages.
Cornelius Nepos,* with Questions and Answers, and an Imitative
Exercise on each Chapter. With Notes by E. A. JOHNSON, Pro-
fessor of Latin in University of New York. New edition, en-
larged, with a Lexicon, Historical and Geographical Index, etc.
12mo. 350 pages.
Beza's Latin Version of the New Testament. 12mo. 291 pages.
Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War. With English
Notes, Critical and Explanatory ; a Lexicon, Geographical and
Historical Indexes, and a Map of Gaul. By J. A. SPENCER, D. D.
12ino. 408 pages.
Cicero's Select Orations. With Notes for the use of Schools and
Colleges. By E. A. JOHNSON, Professor of Latin in the Univer-
sity of New York. 12mo. 459 pages.
Cicero de Officiis. With English Notes, mostly translated from
Zump and Bonnell. -By THOMAS A. THACHEB, of Yale College.
12mo. 194 pages.
STANDARD CLASSICAL WORKS.
Horace, The Works of. With English Notes, for the use of
Schools and Colleges. By J. L. LINCOLN, Professor of Latin
Language and Literature in Brown University. 12mo. 575 pages.
Livy. Selections from the first five books, together with the twen-
ty-first and twenty-second books entire. With a Plan of Rome,
and a Map of the Passage of Hannibal, and English Notes for
the use of Schools. By J. L. LINCOLN, Prof, of the Latin Lan-
guage and Literature in Brown University. 12mo. 329 pages.
Quintus Curtius: Life and Exploits of Alexander the Great.
Edited and illustrated with English Notes, by WILLIAM HENRY
CROSBY. 12mo. 385 pages.
Sallust's Jugurtha and Catilina, With Notes and a Vocabu-
lary. By BUTLER and STURGUS. 12mo. 397 pages.
It is believed that this will be found superior to any edition
heretofore published in this country.
The Histories of Tacitus. With Notes for Colleges. By W. S.
TYLER, Professor of Latin and Greek in Amherst College.
12mo. 453 pages.
Tacitus's Germania and Agricola. With Notes for Colleges.
By W. S. TYLER. 12mo. 193 pages.
Virgil's JEneid.* With Explanatory Notes. By HENRY FRIEZE,
Professor of Latin in the State University of Michigan. (Re-
cently published.) 12mo. 598 pages.
The tjqse is unusually large and distinct. The work contains
eighty-five engravings, which delineate the usages, customs, weap-
ons, arts, and mythology of the ancients, with a vividness that can
be attained only by pictorial illustrations. '
GREEK TEXT-BOOKS.
A First Greek Book* and Introductory Reader, By A.
HARKNESS, Ph.D., author of "Arnold's First Latin Book."
t; Second Latin Book," etc. (Recently published.) 12mo.
Acts of the Apostles, according to the text of AUGUSTUS HAHN.
With Notes and a Lexicon by JOHN J. OWEN, D. D., LL. D.
With Map. 12mo.
Arnold's First Greek Book,* on the Plan of the First Latin
Book. 12mo. 297 pages.
Arnold's Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composi-
tion.* 12rno. 297 pages.
1 Second Part to the above.* I2mo. 248 pages.
|3^~ SEE END OP THIS VOLUME.
AN
INTRODUCTORY
LATIN BOOK,
INTENDED AS AN
ELEMENTARY DRILL -BOOK,
INFLECTIONS AND PRINCIPLES OF THE LANGUAGE,
AND AS AN
I N T H 0 D U C T 1 0
AUTHOR'S GRAMMAR, READER AND LATIN COMPOSITION.
BY
ALBERT HARKNESS,
_ Professor in Broivn University.
AUTHOR OP "A LAT1X GRAMMAR," UA LATIN READER," "A FIRST GREEK BOOK," KTO.
3IT7
YORK :
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY,
549 & 551 BROADWAY.
1876,
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year I860, by
ALBERT HARKNESS,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Rhode Island.
PR
E P A C E.
THE volume now offered to the public is intended to
furnish the pupil his first lessons in Latin. As an Ele-
mentary Drill-book, it aims to supply a want long felt in
our schools. In no stage of a course of classical study is
judicious instruction of more vital importance than in that
which deals with the forms and elements of the Latin lan-
guage. To the beginner, every thing is new, and requires
minute and careful illustration. » lie must at the very out-
set become so familiar with all the grammatical inflections,
with their exact form and force, that he will recognize
them with promptness and certainty wherever they occur,
lie must not lose time in uncertain conjecture, where posi-
tive knowledge alone will be of any real value. Improve-
ment on this point is one of the pressing needs of our
schools. This volume is intended as a contribution to
classical education in aid of this particular work. It aims
to lighten the burden of the teacher in elementary drill,
and to aid him in grounding his pupils in the first ele-
ments of the Latin language.
It is the unmistakable verdict of the class-room, that
theory and practice must not be separated in the study of
language. The true method of instruction will make am-
ple provision for both. On the one hand, the pupil must,
by a vigorous use of the memory, become master of all the
grammatical forms and rules ; while, on the other hand, he
must not be denied the luxury of using the knowledge
which he is so laboriously acquiring.
To this just and urgent demand of the class-room, the
iii
IV PREFACE.
author's First Latin Book, published fifteen years since, on
the basis of Dr. Arnold's works, owed its origin. For the
favor with which it was .received, and for the generous
interest with which it has so long been regarded, the author
desires here to express his sincere thanks to the numerous
classical instructors whose fidelity in its use has contrib-
uted so largely to its success. In the conviction, however,
that it has now done its appointed work, he begs leave to
offer them the present volume as its successor.
The great objection to most First Latin Books, that,
however excellent they may be in themselves, they are not
especially adapted to any particular Grammar, and that
they accordingly fill the memory of the pupil with rules
and statements which must, as far as possible, be unlearned
as soon as he passes to his Grammar, is entirely obviated
in this volume. All the grammatical portions of it, even
to the numbering of the articles, arc introduced in the
exact form and language of the author's Grammar. In-
deed, the paradigms are not only the same as in the Gram-
mar, but also occupy the same place on the page ; so that
even the local associations which the beginner so readily
forms with the pages of his first book may be transferred
directly to the Grammar.
This work is intended to be complete in itself. It com-
prises a distinct outline of Latin Grammar, Exercises for
Double Translation, Suggestions to the Learner, Notes and
Vocabularies. As an Introduction to the author's Gram-
mar, Reader and Latin Composition, it discusses and illus-
trates precisely those points which are deemed most essen-
tial as a preparation for the course of study presented in
those works.
PROVIDENCE, R.I., June, 1866.
TJIIVBRSITY
CONTENTS.
PART FIRST.
OKTHOGKAPHY.
Page.
Alphabet 1
Sounds of Letters 2
Exercise I 3
"II 4
III 5
Syllables G
Quantity 6
Accentuation 7
Exercise IV. ., 7
PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER I.
NOUNS.
Gender .......... 8
Person and Number 9
Cases 9
Declensions 10
First Declension . 11
Exercise Y 11
Second Declension . . . . 13
Exercise VI. . . . 14
VII. 16
Third Declension .17
Exercise VIII 23
"IX 25
Fourth Declension ' . .26
Exercise X . . *. . 27
v
VI CONTENTS.
Page.
Fifth Declension 28
Exercise XI. . . .29
CHAPTER H.
ADJECTIVES.
First and Second Declensions 30
Exercise XII 33
Third Declension 35
Exercise XIII 37
Comparison of Adjectives . . . . . . .38
Exercise XI Y 39
Numeral Adjectives 40
Exercise XV 42
CHAPTER HI.
PRONOUNS.
Personal Pronouns .43
Possessive .44
Demonstrative 44
Relative 45
Interrogative . . . 46
Indefinite 46
Exercise XYI 47
CHAPTER IY.
VERBS.
Yoiccs . . . 48
Moods 49
Tenses 50
Numbers ' 50
Persons 51
Conjugation 51
The Yerb Sum 52
Exercise XYII 56
XVIII. 57
XIX 60
First Conjugation . . . 62
Exercise XX 6'
CONTENTS. Vii
Tage.
Exercise XXI G7
" XXII. . . . 69
XXIII. . . 71
XXIV 73
XXV. . .74
XXVI 75
XXVII 76
Second Conjugation . 78
Exercise XXVIII. . 82
XXIX. 83
XXX 84
XXXI 85
• " XXXII. 86
XXXIII .87
XXXIV 88
Third Conjugation .90
Exercise XXXV 94
XXXVI 95
XXXVII 96
XXXVIII .97
XXXIX . .97
" XL 98
XLI 99
Fourth Conjugation . . .100
Exercise XLII 104
XLIII 104
XLIV .105
XLV 106
XLVI. . . . . . . . . .107
XLVII 107
XLVIII 108
Verbs in 10 110
Exercise XLIX. *. .112
PART THIRD.
SYKTTAX.
CHAPTER*!.
SYNTAX OF SENTENCES.
Section.
I. Classification of Sentences 114
II. Simple Sentences 115
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER II.
SYNTAX OP NOUNS.
Section. Page.
I. Agreement of Nouns 117
Exercise L. 117
LI 119
II. Nominative. 120
Exercise LII. 120
III. Vocative 121
Exercise LIII .121
IV. Accusative 122
Exercise LI V 123
" LV . 124
" LVI 125
V. Dative 126
Exercise LVII 127
" LVIII 129
VI. Genitive ' . . . . 130
Exercise LIX 131
" LX 132
VII. Ablative 133
Exercise LXI 135
" LXII 137
LXIII. . 138
LXIV. 140
VIII. Cases with Prepositions 141
Exercise LXV 142
Suggestions to the Learner 143
Latin-English Vocabulary . . 147
English-Latin Vocabulary . .157
EXPLANATION OF REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS.
THE numerals refer to articles in this work,
The following abbreviations occur:
abl ablative.
ace accusative.
act active.
julv adverb.
conj conjunction.
dat dative.
f. . feminine.
gen genitive.
indef. indefinite.
interrog interrogative.
m , masculine.
n neuter.
nom nominatire.
P page.
part particle.
pass passive.
pers person.
plur., or pi. . . . plural.
prep preposition.
rel relative.
sing singular.
voc. ...... vocative.
ix
.
(TJII7HBSITY
INTEODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
1. LATIN GRAMMAR treats of the principles of the Latin
language.
PART FIRST.
ORTHOGRAPHY.1
ALPHABET.
2. THE Latin alphabet is the same as the English, with
the omission of iv.
3. Classes of Letters. — Letters are divided into two
classes :
I. Vowels a, e, i,-o, u, y.
II. Consonants: —
1. Liquids 1, m, n, r.
2. Spirants h, s.
3. Mutes : 1) Labials p, b, f, v.
2) Palatals . . . . c, g, k, q, j.
3) Linguals . . . . t, d.
4. Double Consonants . . . . x, z.
4. Combinations of Letters. — We notice here,
1. Diphthongs, — combinations of two vowels in one syllable.
The most common are ae, oe, au.
2. Double Consonants, — x = cs or gs ; z = ds or ts.
3. C%, phj th, are best treated, not as combinations of letters,
but only as aspirated forms of c, />, and /, as li is only a breathing.
1 Orthography treats of the letters and sounds of the language.
2 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
SOUNDS OF LETTERS.
5. Scholars in different countries generally pronounce
Latin substantially as they do their own languages. In
this country, however, two distinct systems are recog-
nized, generally known as the English and the Continent-
al Method^ For the convenience of the instructor, w*
add a brief outline of each.
I. ENGLISH METHOD.
1. /Sounds of Vowels.
6. Vowels generally have their long or short English
sounds.
7. Long Sound. — Vowels have their long English sounds
— a as in fate, e in mete, i in pine, o in note, it in tube, y
in type — in the following situations:
1. In final syllables ending in a vowel:2 se, si, serf-vi,
serf-vo, corf-nu, mV-sy.
2. In all syllables before a vowel or diphthong : dd-us,
de~o*-rum, def-ae, di-ef-i, nif-hi-hcm?
3. In. penultimate4 and unaccented syllables, not final,
before a single consonant, or a mute with I or r: pa'-ter,
paf-tres, Af-thos, 0J-thrys, do-lof-ris. But
1) A unaccented has the sound of a final in America : men'-sa.
8. Short Sound. — Vowels have the short English sound
— a as in fat, e in met, i in pin, o in not, u in tub, y in
myth — in the following situations:
1 Strictly speaking, there is no Continental Method, as every nation
on the continent of Europe has its own method.
2 Some give to i in both syllables of tibi and sibi the short sound.
3 In these rules, no account is taken of h, as that is only a breathing :
hence the first i in nihilum is treated as a vowel before another vowel :
for the same reason, ch, ph} and th are treated as single mutes ; thus th
in Athos and Otkrys.
4 Penultimate, the last syllabic but one.
ORTHOGRAPHY. - SOUNDS OF LETTERS. 3
1. Iii final syllables ending in a consonant : a' -mat, a'-
met, rex' -it, sol, cori-sid, Te'-thys / except post, cs final, and
os final in plural cases : res, di'-es, hos, a'-gros.
2. In all syllables before x, or any two consonants except
a mute with I or r (7, 3) : rex'-it, bel'-lum, rex-ef-runt, bel-
lo'-rum.
3. In all accented syllables before one or more consonants,
except the penultimate : dom'-i-nus, pat'-ri-bus. But
1) A, e, or o, before a single consonant (or a mute with I or r)
followed by e, 2, or ?/, before another vowel, has the long sound:
a'-ci-es, a'-cri-a, me-re-o, do'-ce-o.
2) £7, in any syllable not final, before a single consonant, or a
mute with I or r, except iW, has the long sound : Pu'-ni-cus,
Iri-tas.
2. Sounds of Diphthongs.
9. Ae and oe are pronounced like e :
1) long: Caef-sar (Ce'-sar), Oer-ta (E'-ta).
2) short: Daedf-a~lus (Ded'-a-lus), Oedf-i-pus.
Au as in author : aur-rum.
Eu . . neuter: neu'-ter*
EXERCISE I.
Give the sounds of the Vowels and Diphthongs in thA
following icords.
1. Men^-sam,2 men^-sas, men!-sis, men'-sae,3 men-sa'-rum.4
2. Ho'-ram,5 ho'-ras, ho'-ris, hof-rae,6 ho-raf-rum.7 p. Schof-
la,8 scho;-lam, scho^-las, scho(-lis, scho^-lae, scho-la'-rum.
4. Co-ro'-na,8 co-ro^-nam, co-rof-nas, co-ro'-nis, co-ro'-nae.9
1 Ei and oi are seldom diphthongs; but, when so used, they have
the long sound of i: hei, cut.
2 8, 2; 8, 1. *7, 3; 8, 1. 8 7, 3 ; 7,3, 1).
3 8, 2; 9; 7, 1. 6 7, 3; 9; 7, 1. 9 7, 3 ; 9 ; 7, L
4 8, 2; 7, 3; 8, 1. 7 7, 3; 8, 1.
* INTEODTJCTOKY LATIN BOOK.
3. Sounds of Consonants.
10. The consonants are pronounced in general as in
English; but a few directions may aid the learner.
11. C, G, S, T, and X are generally pronounced with
their ordinary English sounds. Thus,
1. C and g are soft (like s and j) before <?, i, y, ae, and oe; and
hard in other situations: ce'-do (sedo), ci'-vis, Cy'-rus, cae'-do,
coef-na, a'-ge (a-je), a'-gi; ca'-do (ka'do), co'-go, cum, Ga-des.
2. S generally has its regular English sound as in son, thus :
sa'-cer, so'-ror, si'-dus. But
1) S final after <?, ae, au, &, ?M, 71, r, is pronounced like z: spes,
praes, laus, urbs, hi' -ems, mons, pars.
3. T has its regular English sound as in time : ti'-mor, to'-tus.
4. X has generally its regular English sound like Jcs: rex'-i
(rek'-si), ux'-or (uk'-sor).
12. C, S, T, and X — Aspirated. — Before i, preceded by
an accented syllable and followed by a vowel, c, 5, £, and
x are aspirated, — c, ,9, and t taking the sound of sh, x that
of Jcsh: sor-ci-us (so'-she-us), Al '-si-urn (Al'-she-um), arr-ti-
um (a^-she-um) ; anx'-i-us (ank^she-us). C has also the
sound of sh before eu and T/O, preceded by an accented syl-
lable: ca-du'-ce-us (ca-du'-she-us), Sicr-y-on (Sisl/-e-on).
13. Silent Consonants. — An initial consonant, with or
without the aspirate /?, is sometimes silent : Cne'-us (NV-
us).
EXERCISE II.
Give the sounds of ihe+Letters in the following words.
1. Ci'-vis,1 civ'-i-um, civ'-i-bus. 2. Carf-men,2 carr-mi-
nis, car'-mi-ne.3 3. Rex,4 re'-gis,5 ref-gi, re'-gnm.5' 4. Ca'-
put,6 capr-i-tis, cap'-i-tum. 5. A'-ci-em,7 a'-ci-e, ar-ci-es.8
6. Ars,8 ar'-tis, ar'-tes,8 ar'-ti-um.9
Ml, 1 and 2; 7, 3; 8, 1.
Ml, 1, and 3.
2 11, 1 ; 8, 2 ; 8, 1.
7 8, 3, 1); 12;
8, 1.
3 8,3; 7,3; 7,1.
Ml, 2, 1).
4 11, 4.
M2.
Ml, l; 7, 3; 8, 1.
ORTHOGRAPHY. - SOUNDS OF LETTERS. 5
II. CONTINENTAL METHOD.1
1. Sounds of Vowels.
14. Each vowel has in the main one uniform sound;2
but the length or duration of the sound depends upon the
quantity of the vowel. See 20.
The vowel-sounds are as follows :
a like a in father : e.g., a'-ra.
e " a made : "
i " e me: "
o " 6 no : " o'-ro.
u " 6 do : " u'-num.
y " e me; " Ny'-sa.
2. Sounds of Diphthongs.
15. Ae and oe like a in made : e.g., ae'-tas, coe'-lum.
au " ou " out: " au'-rum?
3. Sounds of Consonants.
16. The pronunciation of the consonants is similar to
that of the English method ; but it varies somewhat in dif-
ferent countries.
EXERCISE III.
Give the sounds of the Letters in the following words,
according to the Continental Method.
1. Ho'-ra, ho'-ram, ho'-ras, ho'-rls, ho'-rae, ho-ra'-rum.
2. Glo'-ri-S, glo'-ri-am, glo'-ri-ae. 3. Do'-num, do'-ni, do'-
1 If the English Method is adopted as the standard in the school, this
outline of the Continental Method should be omitted.
2 These sounds sometimes undergo slight modifications in uniting
with the various consonants.
3 In other combinations, the two vowels aro generally pronounced
separately; but ei and eu occur as diphthongs, with nearly the same
sound as in English.
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
DO, do'-na, do-no'-rum, do'-nis. 4. Cl'-vis, ci'-vl, ci'-vem,
cl'-ves, civ'-i-iim, civ'-i-bus.
SYLLABLES.
17. In the pronunciation of Latin, every word has as
many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs; thus the
Latin words more, vice, acute, and persuade are pro-
nounced, not as the same words are in English, but with
their vowel-sounds all heard in separate syllables; thus:
mo' -re, vi'~ce, a-cu'-te, per-sua'-de.
QUANTITY.
20. Syllables are, in quantity or length, either long,
short, or common.1
21. Long. — A syllable is long in quantity,
1. If it contains a diphthong: haec.
2. If its vowel is followed by J, x, z, or any two conso-
nants, except a mute with I or r : rex, mons.
22. Short. — A syllable is short if its vowel is followed
by another vowel or a diphthong : dir-es, vi'-ae, ni'-hil?
23. Common, — A syllable is common, if its vowel, natu-
rally 3 short, is followed by a mute with I or r : a'-gri.
24. The signs ", w, *, denote respectively that the syllables over
which they are placed are long, short, or common : si-grd-rum.*
1 Common ; i.e., sometimes long, and sometimes short.
2 No account is taken of the breathing h. See 7, 2, note 3.
3 A vowel is said to be naturally short when it is short in its own
nature; i.e., in itself, without reference to its position.
4 By referring to 14, it will be seen, that, in the Continental Method,
quantity and sound coincide with each other : a vowel long in quantity is
long in sound, and a vowel short in quantity is short in sound. But,
by referring to 7 and 8, it will be seen, that, in the English Method, the
quantity of a vowel does not at all affect its sound, except in determin-
ing the accent (26). Hence, in this method, a vowel long in quantity is
often short in sound, and a vowel short in quantity is often long in
sound. Thus, in rex, urbs, drs, sol, the vowels are all long in quantity;
OKTHOGKAPHY. — ACCENTUATION. 7
ACCENTUATION.
I. PKIMAKY ACCENT.
25. Monosyllables are treated as accented syllables:
mons, nos.
26. Other words are accented as follows : l
1. Words of two syllables — always on the first : menf-sa.
2. Words of more than two syllables — on the penult s
if that is long in quantity, otherwise on the antepenult : 2
ho-nb'-ris, con'-su-tis.
II. SECONDARY ACCENTS.
27. A second accent is placed on the second or third syllable
before the primary accent, — on the second, if that is the first syl-
lable of the word, or is long in quantity ; otherwise on the third :
mon'-u-e'-runt) mon'-u-e-ra'-mus^ in-stau'-ra-ve'-runt.
28. In the same way, a third accent is placed on the second or
third syllable before the second accent : honf-o-riff-i-cen-tis'-si~mus.
EXEKCISE IV.
Accent and pronounce the following Words.
1. Corona,3 coronae, coronarum.4 2. Gemmae,5 gemmain,
gemmarum. 3. Sapientiae,6 amlcitiae, justitiae, gloriae.7
but by 8, 1, they all have the short English sounds : while in ave, mare,
the vowels are all short in quantity; but by 7, 1, and 3, they all have
the long English sounds. Hence, in pronouncing according to the
English Method, determine the place of the accent by the quantity (ac-
cording to 26), and then determine the sounds of the letters irrespective
of quantity (according to 7-12).
1 In the subsequent pages, the pupil will be expected to accent words
in pronunciation according to these rules. The quantity of the penult
in words of more than two syllables will therefore be marked (unless
determined by 21 and 22), to enable him to ascertain the place of the
accent.
2 Penult, last syllable but one ; antepenult, the last but two.
8 26, 2; 7,3, 1). 5 11, 1; 26, 1. 7 11, 1 ; 8,3, 1).
426, 2; 27. 6 27 ; 8,3, 1); 12.
8 INTEODUCTOEY LATI^ BOOK.
4. Sapientiam, amicitiam, justitiam, gloriam. 5. Sapientia,
amicitia, justitia, gloria.
PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY.
29. ETYMOLOGY treats of the classification, inflection,
and derivation of words.
30. The Parts of Speech l are — Nouns, Adjectives,
Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions,
and Interjections.
CHAPTER I.
ffOUNS.
31. A Noun, or Substantive, is a name, as of a person,
place, or thing : Cicero, Cicero ; Roma, Rome ; puer, boy ;
domus, house.
1. A Proper Noun is a proper name, as of a person or place :
Cicero, Roma.
2. A Common Noun is a name common to all the members of a
class of objects : rzr, man ; equus, horse.
32. Nouns have Gender, Number, Person, and Case.
•
GENDER.
33. There are three genders,2 — Masculine, Feminine,
and Neuter.
1 Thus in Latin, as in English, words arc divided, according to their
use, into eight classes, called Parts of Speech.
2 In English, Gender denotes sex. Accordingly, masculine nouns de-
note males,- feminine nouns, females; and neuter nouns, objects which
are neither male nor female. In Latin, however, this natural distinction
ETYMOLOGY . — NOUNS. 9
34. In some nouns, gender is determined by significa-
tion ; in others, by endings.
35. GENERAL RULES FOR GENDBR.
I. MASCULINES.
1. Names of Males: Cicero ; vir, man; rex, king.
2. Names of River 's, Winds, and Months : Rlienus,
Rhine ; Notus, south wind ; Aprilis, April.
II. FEMININE.
1. Names of Females: mutter, woman; leaena, lioness.
2. Names of Countries, Towns, Islands, and Trees:
Aegyptus, Egypt; Roma, Rome; Delos, Delos; pirus,
pear-tree.
PERSON AND NUMBER.
37. The Latin, like the English, has three persons and
two numbers. The first person denotes the speaker ; the
second, the person spoken to ; the third, the person spoken
of. The singular number denotes one, the plural more
than one.
CASES.
38. The Latin has six cases : *
Names. English Equivalents.
Nominative, Nominative.
Genitive, Possessive, or Objective with of.
Dative, Objective with to or for.
Accusative, Objective.
Vocative, Nominative Independent.
Ablative, Objective with from, by, in, with.
of gander is applied only to the names of males and females ; while, in
all other nouns, gender depends upon an artificial distinction, according
to grammatical rules.
1 The case of a noun shows the relation which that noun sustains to
other words ; as, John's book. Here the possessive case (John's) shows
that John sustains to the book the relation of possessor.
10 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
1. Oblique Cases. — In distinction from the Nominative and Voc-
ative (casus recti, right cases), the other cases are called oblique
(casus obliqui).
2. Case-Endings. — In form, the several cases are, in general, dis-
tinguished from each other by certain terminations called case-
endings : Nona, mensa, Gen. mensae, &c.
3. Cases alike. — But certain cases are not distinguished in form.
Thus,
1) The Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative, in neuters, are alike,
and in the plural end in a.
2) The Nominative and Vocative are alike in all nouns, except
those in us of the second declension (45).
3) The Dative and Ablative Plural are alike.
DECLENSIONS.
39. The formation of the several cases is called Declen-
sion.
40. Five Declensions. — In Latin, there are five declen-
sions, distinguished from each other by the following
Genitive Endings.
Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Dec. IV. Dec. V.
ae, I, is, us, el.1
41. Stem and Endings. — In any noun, of whatever de-
clension,
1. The stem2 may be found by dropping the ending of
the genitive singular.
2. The several cases may be formed by adding to this
stem the case-endings.
1 See 119, l.
2 The stem is the basis of the word, or the part to which the several
endings are added to form the various cases. Thus in the forms, mensa,
mensae, mensdm, mensis, &c., given under 42, it will be observed that
mens remains unchanged; and that, by the addition of the endings, a,
ae, am, is, &c., to it, the several cases are formed. Here mcns is the
stem; and a, ae, am, is, £c., are the case-endings.
ETYMOLOGY. FIEST DECLENSION". 11
FIRST DECLENSION.
42. Nouns of the first declension end in
S. and e, — feminine ; as and es, — masculine.1
But pure Latin nouns end only in a, and are declined
ns follows :
SIXGULAK.
Norn, mensa, a table, a
Gen. mensae, of a table, ae
Dat. mensae, to, for, a table, ae
Ace. mensem, a table, fim
Foe. mensa, 0 table, it
-4W. mensa, with, from, by, a table, ii
PLURAL.
Norn, mensac, tables, ae
G^en. mensarikm, of tables, arttm
Z)a^. mensls, to, for, tables, is
-4cc. mensas, tables, as
T'bc. mensac, 0 ta&Zes, ac
-4W mensis, ivith,from, by, tables, is.
1. Case-Endings From an inspection of this example, it will be
seen that the several cases are distinguished from each other by
the case-endings placed on the right.
2. Examples for Practice. — With these endings decline :
Ala, wing; aqua, water; causa, cause; fortuna, fortune; porta,
gate ; victoria, victory.
EXERCISE V.JpjFi**/^
I. Vocabulary.
Amicltia, ae,2 f? friendship.
Corona, ae, f. crown.
1 That is, nouns of this declension in a and e are feminine, and those
in as and es arc masculine.
2 The ending ae is the case-ending of the Genitive: amicitla; Gen.,
amicitiae.
3 Gender is indicated in the vocabularies by m. for masculine, f. for
feminine, and n. for neuter.
IXTKODUCTOIJY LATIX BOOK.
Gemma ac, f. yem.
Gloria, ac, f. ylory.
Ilora, ac, /. hour.
Justitia, ac, /. justice.
Sapientia, ae, f. ivisdom.
Scholii, ae, f. school.
II. Translate into English.
1. Corona,1 corona, coronae,2 coronam, coronfirum, coro-
nis, coronas. 2. Gemma, gemma, gemmae, gemmam,
gemmarum, gemmis, gemmas. 3. Sapientia, amicitia, jus-
titia, gloria. 4. Sapientiam, amicitiam, justitiam, gloriam.
5. Sapientia, amicitia, justitia, gloria. G. Scholarum, ho-
iTirum. 7. Scholis, lioris. 8. Scholas, lioras.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Friendship, friendships. 2. Of3 friendship, of friend-
ships. 3. To friendship, to friendships. 4. By friendship,
by friendships. 5. Justice, by justice, of justice, to justice.
G. Wisdom, glory. 7. With wisdom, with glory. 8. To
wisdom, to glory* 9. Of wisdom, of glory. 10. Of a4
crown, of a gem. 11. Crowns, gems. 12. With the4
crowns, with the gems. 13. Of crowns, of gems. '
1 As the Latin lias no article, a noun may, according to the connec-
tion in. which it is used, be translated (1) without the article *, as, corona,
crown; (2) with the indefinite article a or an; as, corona, a crown; (3)
with the definite article the; as, corona, the crown.
2 When the same Latin form may be found in two or more cases, the
pupil is expected to give the meaning for each case. Thus coronae may
be in the Genitive or Dative Singular, or in the Nominative or Voca-
tive Plural.
3 The pupil will observe that the English prepositions, of, to, bj,
may be rendered into Latin by simply changing the ending of the word.
Thus friendship, amicitia ; of friendship, amicitiac.
4 The pupil will remember that the English articles, a, an, and the,
arc not to be rendered into Latin at all. Crown, a crown, and the crownf
are all rendered into Latin by the same word.
ETYMOLOGY. — SECOND DECLENSION.
13
SECOND DECLENSION.
45. Nouns of the second declension end in
er, ir, iis, os, — masculine; iim, on, — neuter.
But pure Latin nouns end only in er, ir, us, um, and are
declined as follows :
Servus, slave. Puer, boy. Age?, field. Templum, temple,
SINGULAR.
N. serviis
pu2r
ag-er
templiini
G, servl
puerl
%rl
templl
Z>. servo
pu£ro
agro
templo
A. servtiiii
pueriiisi
agriiiaa
templitm
V. serve
puer
%er
templiiin.
A. servo
puero
agro
templo
PLURAL.
N. servl
puerl
agri
templti
G. servoriim
puerorikm
agroi-iiiii
temploru.nl
D. sen-Is
puerls
%rls
templls
A. servos
puSros
agros
templa,
V. servl
puerl
agrl
templa
A. scrvls.
pu6rls.
agris.
templls.
1. Case-Endings From an inspection of the paradigms, it will
be seen that they are declined with the following
Case-endinys.
1. us.
3. um.
SINGULAR.
JV. us
1
iim
G. I
1
I
D. o
5
6
A. iim
iim
iim •
V. e
i
iim
A. o
6
o
1 The endings for the Nom. and Voc. Sing, are wanting in nouns in
er: thus puer is the stem without any case-ending; the full form would
DC vuerus.
14 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
PLURAL.
N.I I a
G. Drum orum orum
D. Is is is
A. os os a
V.I I a
A. is. is. is.
2. Examples for Practice. — Like SERVUS : annus, year ; dontinus.
master. — Like PUER: gener, son-in-law; socer, father-in-law. —
Like AGER: faber, artisan; magister, master. — Like TEMPLUM:
bellum, war ; regnum, kingdom.
3. Paradigms. — Observe
1) That p uer differs in declension from servus only in dropping
the endings us and e in the Nom. and Voc. : Nom. puer for puerus,
Voc. puer for puere.
2) That ager Offers from puer only in dropping e before r.
3) That templum, as a neuter noun, has the Nom., Accus., and
Voc. alike, ending in the plural in a. See 38, 3.
EXERCISE VI.
I. Vocabulary.
Doniim, i, n. gift.
Gener, generi, m. son-in-law.
Liber, libri, m. look.
Oculus, I, m. eye.
Praeceptiim, I, n. rule, precept.
Socer, soceri, m. father-in-law.
Tyrannus, I, m. tyrant.
Verbum, I, n. word.
II. Translate into English.
1. Oculus, oculi, oculo, oculum, ocule, oculorum, oculis,
oculos. 2. Socer, soceri, socero, socerum, socerorum, soce-
ris, soceros. 3. Servi, tyranni. 4. Pueri, generi. 5. Agri,
libri. 6. Templi, doni. 7. Servo, tyranno. 8. Puerum,
generum. 9. Agrorum, librornm. 10. Templa, dona, 11.
Servum, servos. 12. Generi, generorum. 13. Agri, agro-
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND DECLENSION. 15
rum, 14. Dono, donis. 15. Verbum, praeccptum. 16.
Verbi> praecepti.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The slave, the slaves. 2. For the slave, for the slaves.
3. Of the slave, of the slaves. 4. Of the father-in-law,
of the son-in-law. 5. Of the fathers-in-law, of the sons-in-
law. 6. For the fathers-in-law, for the sons-in-law. 7. The
boy, the field. 8. The boys, the fields. 9. The gift, the
gifts. 10. With the gift, with the gifts. 11. The tyrant,
the boy, the book, the precept. 12. Of the tyrant, of the
boy, of the book, of the precept.
SECOND DECLENSION — CONTINUED.
RULE II— Appositives.
363. An Appositive agrees with its Subject in CASE : 1
Cluilius rex moritur, Cluilius the king dies. Liv. Urbes Car-
thago atque Niimantia, the cities Carthage and Numantia. Cic.
I. DIRECTIONS FOR PARSING.
In parsing a Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun,
1. Name the Part of Speech to which it belongs.
2. Decline 2 it.
3. Give its Gender, Number, Case, &c.
4. Give its Syntax,3 and the Rule for it.
1 A noun or pronoun used to explain or identify another noun or pro-
noun, denoting the same person or thing, is called an appositive; as,
Cluilius rex, Cluilius the king. Here rex, the king, is the appositive,
showing the rank or office of Cluilius, — Cluilius the king. The noun
or pronoun to which the appositive is added — Cluilius in the example —
is called the subject of the appositive.
2 Adjectives in the Comparative or in the Superlative degree (160)
should also be compared (162).
3 By the Syntax of a word is meant the Grammatical construction of
it. Thus we give the Syntax of regina, under the Model, by stating
that it is in apposition with its subject, Artemisia.
2
16 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
MODEL.
Artemisia, regina, Artemisia the queen.
Regina is a noun (31) of the First Declension (42), as it Las ae
in the Genitive Singular (40); STEM, regln (41). Singular: re-
gina, reglnae, reglnae, reglnam, regina, regina. Plural: reglnae,
reginarum, rcglnis, reglnas, reglnae, reglnis. It is of the Feminine
gender, as the names of females are feminine by 35, II. 1. It is in
the Nominative Singular, in apposition with its subject Artemisia,
with which it agrees in case, according to Rule LI. : " An Apposi-
tive agrees with its Subject in CASE."
EXERCISE VII.
I. Vocabulary.
Cams, ii, m. Caius, a proper name.
Filia, ae, f. daughter.
Hasta, ae?>/! spear.
Pisistratus, I, m. Pisistratus, Tyrant Qf Athens.
Ramus, I, m. branch.
Regina, ae, /. queen.
Tullia, ae, f. Tullia, a proper name.
Victoria, ae, /. Victoria, Queen of England.
II. Translate into English.
1. Ramus, hasta. 2. Kami, hastae. 3. Ramo, hastac.
4. Ramum, hastam. 5. Ramo, hasta. 6. Ramorum, has-
tarum. 7. Ramis, hastis. 8. Ramos, hastas. 9. Tyranni,
tyrannorum. 10. Verbum, verba. 11. Verbo, verbis.
12. Templum, templa. 13. Templi, templorum. 14. Pi-
sistrutus tyrannus.1 15. Pisistrati tyranni. 16. Pisistruto
tyranno. 17. Tullia filia. 18. Tulliae filiae. 19. Tul-
liam filiam.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. The tyrant, the crown. 2. The tyrants, the crowns.
1 Tyrannus is an appositivc, in the Nominative, in agreement with its
subject, Pisistratus, according to Rule II. 363.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD DECLENSION. 17
3. Of the tyrant, of the crown. , 4. Of the tyrants, of the
crowns. 5, To the tyrant, to the crown. 6. To the tyrants,
to the crowns. 7. The book, the books. 8. With the
book, with the books. 9. Of Pisistratus, for Pisistratus.
10. Of the queen, for the queen. 11. Cains the slave.1
12. Of Caius the slave. 13. For Caius the slave. 14.
Victoria the queen. 15. For Victoria the queen. 16,
Of Victoria the queen.
THIRD DECLENSION.
48. Nouns of the third declension end in
a, e, i, o, y, c, 1, n, r, s, t, x.
I. MASCULINE ENDINGS :2
o, or, os, er, es increasing in the genitive.
II. FEMININE ENDINGS:
as, is, ys, x, cs not increasing in the genitwe ; s preceded
l>y a consonant.
III. NEUTER ENDINGS:
a> e? i> 7? c> \ n? *, ar, ur, us.
49. Nouns of this declension may be divided into two
classes :
I. Nouns which have a case-ending in the Nominative
Singular. These all end in e, s, or x.
II. Nouns whicli have no case-ending in the Nomina-
tive Singular.
o
In Class II., the Nom. Sing, is either the same as the stem, or is
formed from it by dropping or changing one or more letters of the
stem: consul, Gen. consiilis; stem, consul, a consul: leo, leonis;
stem, leon (Nom. drops n), lion : carmen, carmmis ; stem, carmin
(Nom. changes in to en), song.
1 See Rule II. 363.
2 That is, nouns with these endings are masculine.
18
1NTKODUCTOKY LATIN BOOK.
50. CLASS I. — WITH NOMINATIVE ENDING.
I. Nouns in es, is, s impure^ and x: — with stem un-
changed in Nominative.
Nubes,/. Avis,/. Urbs,/. Hex, m.
cloud. bird. city. Jting.
SINGULAR.
A7, nubes
avis
urbs
rex2
G. nubis
avis
urbis
rcgis
D. nubl
avl
urbl
regl
A. nubem.
avem
urbein.
regain.
V. nubes
avis
urbs
rex
-1. nube
av£
urbe
rcge"
PLURAL.
N. nubes
aves
urbes
rcges
G. nubiiim.
aviitm
urbiitin
regfim
D. nubilnts
avibiis
urbil>iis
rcgil>its
A. nubes
aves
urbes
reges
V. nubes
aves
urbes
rcges
A. nubl bits.
avil>its.
urbil>iis.
rcgibits.
II. Nouns in es, is, s impure, and x: — with stem
cJ tanged in Nominative.
Miles, m. Lapis, m. Ars,/". Judex, m. and /'
soldier. stone. art.
SINGULAR.
judge.
X. miles
lapis
ars
j udex 2
G. niilitis
lapidis
artis
judicis
D. militl
lapidl
artl
judicl
A. militeni
lapidem
art^m
judic^in
F. mile's
lapis
ars
judex
A. milite
lapide
arte"
judice"
PLURAL.
A", milites
lapides
artes
judices
G. militftm
lapidiiisa.
artiitm
judicitm.
1 Impure; i.e., preceded by a consonant.
2 X in rex = £rs; g belonging to the stem, and s being the Nom.
ending : but in judex, x = cs ; c belonging to the stem, and s being the
Norn, ending.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD DECLENSION.
19
D. milittbiis
lapidifoits
artlbiks
judicll>u.s
A. milites
lapides
rirtes
judices
F. milites
lapides
artes
judices
A. militlbtis.
lapidlbiis.
artibiis.
judiclfotis.
III. Nouns in as, OS, us, and e: — those in as, os, and
us with stein changed, those in e with stem unchanged.
Civitas, f. Nepos, m. Yirtus, f. Mare, n.
state. grandson. virtue. sea.
SINGULAR.
N. civitas
nepos
virtus
milre
G. civitatis
ncputis
virtutis
maris
D. civitatl
neixJtl
virtutl
marl
A. civitat^m
nepotem
virtuteisi
mar^
F. civitas
ncpos
virtus
mare*
A. civitate
nepot^
virtute
marl2
PLURAL,
N. civitates
ncputes
virtutes
maria
G. civitatiiiKi1
nepotttiii
virtutwmi
maritkni.
D. civitatil>u.s
ncpotil>ii.s
virtutil>iis
maribils
A. civitates
nepotes
virtutes
marisi
F. civitates
nepotes
virtutes
maria.
A. civitatibiis.
nepotil>ia.s.
virtutil>tis.
marll>iks.
51. CLASS II. — WITHOUT NOMINATIVE ENDING.
I. Nouns in 1 and r : — with stem uncJianged in Nomi-
native.
Sol, m.
Consul, in.
Passer, m.
Yultur, m.
sun.
consul.
sparrow.
vidture.
SINGULAR.
N. sol
consul
passer
vultur
G. sGlis
consulis
passeris
vulturis
D. sGll ,
consull
passSrl
vulturl
A. solem.
consCil^ni
passereni
vultur^iii
F. sol
consul
passer
vultiir
A. sole
consule"
passere
vulture
PLURAL.
N. sOles
consules
passeres
vultures
G.
consuliiiii.
passSriiin.
vulturttm.
Z). solibiis
consulil>its
passeril>ti.s
vulturibits
1 Sometimes civitatium.
2 Sometimes mare in poetry-
20
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
A. soles
consults passeres
vultures
V. soles
constiles passSres
vultures
A. sollbiks.
constili"biis. passerll>tis.
vulturltofts.
II. Nouns in
o and r : — with stem changed in Nbmi-
native.
Leo, m.
Virgo, f. Pater, m.
Pastor, m.
lion.
maiden. father.
shepherd.
SINGULAR.
N. leo
virgo pater
pastor
G. leonis
virginls patris
pastoris
D. leonl
virginl patrl
pastorl
A. leonem
virginem patr^m
pastorem
F. leo
virgo pater
pastor
A. leone
virgine patre
pastor^
PLURAL.
Tf. Icones
virgines patres
pastor^s
G. leoniim
virginitm patrum
pastoriim.
D. leonlfciis
yirglnl'biis patrll>iis
pastorlbiis
A. leon£s
virgm^s patres
pas tores
F. leones
virgines patres
pas tores
A. leonlfoiis.
virginil>iis. patril>ii.s.
pastoril>iis.
III. Nouns in
en, us, and ut : — with stem changed in
Nominative.
Carmen, n.
Opus, 71. Corpus, n.
Caput, n.
song.
work. body.
head.
SINGULAR.
N. carmen
opus corpus
cupiit
G. carminis
opgris corporis
capitis
D. carrainl
opSrl corporl
capitl
A. carman
optis coipus
caput
V. carman
opus corptis
caput
A. carmine"
opdre corporl
capite
PLURAL.
N. carmina
oper^/ corpora.
capita
G. carminikni
operii-iii. corporiim
capitiini
D. carminlbiis
operi1>iis corporil>fts
capitil>ii«
A. carmina
op6ra corpora
capita
V. carmina
opSra corpora
capita
A. carminlbiis.
operitotts, corporlljus.
capitil>M.s.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD DECLENSION.
21
52. Case-Endings. — From an inspection of the para-
digms, it will be seen,
1. That the nouns belonging to Class II. differ from
those of Class I. only in taking no case-ending in the
Nominative and Vocative Singular.
2. That all nouns of both classes arc declined with the
following
Case-Endings.
\-
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Fern.
Norn, s l (es, is) 2
Gen. is
I
em (im) 3
Dat.
Ace.
Voc. like Nom.
AH. e, I
PLURAL.
Masc. and Fern.
Norn, es
Gen. urn, ium
Dat. ibus
Ace. es
Voc. es
Abl ibus.
Neuter.
£ 2
is
I
like Nora.
it U
e, I
Neuter.
ii, ia
iim, iiim
ibiis
a, ia
a, ia
ibus.
53. Declension. — To apply these endings in declension,
we must know, besides the Nominative Singular,
1. The Gender, as that shows which set of endings
must be used.
2.* The Genitive Singular (or some oblique case), as
that contains the stem (41) to which these endings must
be added.
1 In nouns in x (= cs or gs), s is the case-ending, and the c or g be-
longs to the stem.
2 The dash here implies that the case-ending is sometimes wanting, as
in all nouns of Class II.
3 The enclosed endings are less common than the others.
22 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
54. EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE:
Class I.
Eupcs,
Gen. rupis, f.
rock; hospes, Gen. liospitis, m. guest.
vestis,
vestis, f.
garment; cuspis, cuspidis, f. spear.
trabs,
trabis, f.
beam ; mons, mentis, m. mountain.
lex,
legis, f.'
law; apex, apicis, m. summit.
libertas,
. libertatis,
f. liberty; salus, salutis, f. safety.
sedile,
sedllis, n.
seat ;
Class II.
Kxsul,
Gen. exsiilis, m,
, and f. exile ; dolor, Gen. dolor is, m. pain.
actio,
actionis, f.
action ; imago, imaginis, f. image.
anser,
anser is, m
goose ; frater, fratris, m. brother.
nOmen,
nomlnis, n
name; tempus, temporis, n. time.
RULE XVI — Genitive.
395. Any Noun, not an Appositive, qualifying the
meaning of another noun, is put in the Genitive i1
Catonis orationes, Gate's orations. Cic. Castra hostium, the
camp of the enemy. Liv. Mors Hamilcaris, the death of Hamil-
car. Liv.
MODEL FOR PARSING.
Catonis oration es, Cato*s orations.
Catonis is "a proper noun, as it is the name of a person (31, 1).
It is of the Third Declension, as it has is in the Genitive Singular
(40) ; of Class II., as it has no Nominative Ending (49, II. and 51,
II.) : STEM, Caton (41) ; Nom. Cato (;i dropped, 49, II.). Singu-
1 The Appositivc (363, p. 15) and this qualifying Genitive resemble each
other in the fact that they both, qualify the meaning of another noun :
Cluilius rex, Cluilius the king; Catonis orationes, Cato's orations, or the
orations of Cato. Here the Appositive rex qualifies, or limits, the mean-
ing of Cluilius by showing what Cluilius is meant, — Cluilius the king.
In a similar manner, the Genitive Catonis qualifies, or limits, the mean-
ing of orationes by showing what orations arc meant, — the orations of
Cato. Yet the Appositive and the Genitive are readily distinguished by
the fact that the former qualifies a noun denoting the same person or
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD DECLENSION. 23
lar : l Ca'o, Catonis, Catoni, Catonem, Cato, Catone. It is of the
Masculine gender, as the names of males are masculine by 35, 1. 1.
It is in the Genitive Singular, depending upon ordtidnes, according
to Rule XVI. : " Any noun, not an Appositive, qualifying the mean-
ing of another noun, is put in the Genitive."
THIRD DECLENSION— CONTINUED. — CLASS I.2
EXERCISE VIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Clvis, clvis, m. and/. citizen.
Lex, legis, /. law.
Mors, mortis, /. death.
Pax, pficis, /. peace.
II. Translate into English.
1. Nubis, nubium. 2. Nubem, nubes. 3. Avis, aves.
4. Avi, avibus. 5. Urbs, urbes. G. Urbi, urbibus. 7.
Rex, reges. 8. Regis, regum. 9. Nubes, miles. 10. Nu-
bis, militis. 11. Nubem, militem. 12. Rex, judex. 13.
Regis, judicis. 14. Reges, judices. 15. Civitas, civitates.
16. Virtus, virtutes. 17. Mors regis.3 18. Morte regis.
19. Mortes regum. 20. Virtus judicis. 21. Pacis gloria.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The citizen, to the citizen, of the citizen, of citizens,
for citizens. 2. A cloud, clouds, of a cloud, of clouds, with
a cloud, with clouds. 3. A king, a law. 4. Kings, laws.
thing as itself, while the Genitive qualifies a noun denoting a different
person or thing. Thus, in the examples above, Cluilius and the Apposi-
tive rex denote the same person ; while orationes and the Genitive Cato-
nis denote entirely different objects.
1 As Cato is the name of a person, the Plural is seldom used.
2 This exercise furnishes practice in the declension of nouns belonging
to Class I. of the Third Declension. See 50.
3 Regis is in the Genitive, and qualifies the meaning of 7nors, according
to Rule XVI. 395.
24 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
5. Of the king, of the law. 6. Of the kings, of the laws.
7. To the king, to the law. 8. To the kings, to the laws.
9. The law of the state.1 10. The laws of the state.
\
THIRD DECLENSION— CONTINUED. — CLASS H.
PREPOSITIONS.
RULE XXXII — Cases with Prepositions.
432. The Accusative and Ablative may be used
with Prepositions.2
Ad amicum scrips!, / have written to a friend. Cic. In curiam,
into the senate-house. Liv. In Italia,3 in Italy. Nep. Pro castris,
before the camp.
MODEL FOR PARSING.
Ad amicum, To a friend.
Amicum is a noun (31) of the Second Declension (45), as it has
tin the Genitive Singular (40); STEM, amlc (41). Singular: aml-
cus, amlci, amlco, amicum, amice, amlco. Plural : amid, amicorum,
amlcis, amlcos, amlci, amlcis. It is of the Masculine gender by 45,
is in the Accusative Singular, and is used with the preposition ad,
according to Rule XXXII. : " The Accusative and Ablative may
be used with Prepositions." The Accusative is used with ad.
1 The Latin word for of the state will be in the Genitive, according to
Kule XVI. 395.
2 The Preposition is the part of speech which shows the relations of
objects to each other : in Italia esse, to be in Italy ; ante me, before me.
Here in and ante are prepositions. In the Vocabularies, each preposition,
as it occurs, will be marked as such ; and the case which may be used with
it will be specified. It has not been thought advisable at this early stage
of the course to burden the memory of the learner with a list of preposi-
tions and their cases.
3 Here the Ablative Italia is used with in ; though, in the second ex-
ample, the Accusative curiam is used with the same preposition. The
rule is, that the Latin preposition in is used with the Accusative wheu it
means into, and with the Ablative when it means in.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD DECLENSION. 25
EXERCISE IX.
I. Vocabulary.
Ad, prep, with ace. to, towards.
Cicero, Ciceronis, m. Cicero, the Roman orator.
Consul, consulis, m. consul.1
Contra, prep, with ace. against, contrary to.
Exsul, exsulis, m. and /. exile.
Frater, fratris, m. brother.
Nomen, nominis, n. name.
Oratio, orationis, f. oration, speech.
Orator, oratoris, in. orator.
Victor, victoris, m. victor,, conqueror.
II. Translate into English.
1. Leo, leonis, leones. 2. Virgo, virginis, virgines. 3.
Solis, soleni, soles. 4. Consulis, consulem, consules. 5.
Solibus, consulibus. 6. Passeris, vulturis. 7. Passerum,
vulturum. 8. Patri, pastori. 9. Patres, pastores. 10.
Carmen, carmina. 11. Caput, capita. 12. Opens, corporis.
13. Ciceronis2 oratio. 14. Ciceronis orationes. 15. Ora-
tione consulis. 16. Ad gloriam.3 17. Contra regein.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The exile, the exiles. 2. For the exile, for the exiles.
3. Of an exile, of the exiles. 4. The shepherd, the orator.
5. Of shepherds, of orators. 6. Shepherds, orators. 7. Of
a shepherd, of an orator. 8. A song, a name. 9. Songs,
1 The consuls were joint presidents of the Roman commonwealth.
They were elected annually, and were two in number.
2 See Rule XVI. 395, and Model.
3 The Accusative gloriam is here used with the preposition ad, according
to Rule XXXII. 432.
26
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
names. 10. Of songs, of names. 11. Father, brother.
12. To1 the father, to the brother. 13. Contrary to the
law.2 14. Contrary to the laws of the state.
FOURTH DECLENSION.
116. Nouns of the fourth declension end in
us, — masculine y u, — neuter.
They are declined as follows :
Fructus, fruit. Cornu, horn. Case-Endings.
SINGULAR.
X. fruct&j* cornu. us u
j-'. fractals corniis us us
V. fructul cornik ul ii
-•t. fructiim cornii um u
r. fructiis cornft. us u
*1. ffiicta cornii u u
PLUKAL.
-Y. fructflLM cornusi us ul
G. fnictttum corniiikm uiim uum
D. fructibiis cornil>ils ibus (ubas) ibiis (ubus)
A. fructas corniiii us iul
V. fructfts cornii^ us iut
A. fructil>ii«. cornil>iis. ibus (dbas). ibris (ubus).
1. Case-Endings, — Nouns of this declension are declined with the
case-endings placed on the right.
2. Examples for Practice — Cantus song ; cumix, chariot ; cursus,
course ; versus, verse ; genu, knee.
1 To should still be regarded as a sign of the Dative, though it may
sometimes be rendered by the preposition ad.
2 See Rule XXXII. 432. The words contrary to arc to be rendered by
a single Latin preposition.
ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH DECLENSION. 27
EXERCISE X.
I. Vocabulary.
Adventus, us, m. arrival, approach.
Ante, prep, with ace. before.
Caesar, Caesaris, m. Caesar, a Roman surname.
Cantus, us, m. singing, song.
Conspectus, us, m. . sight, presence.
Exercitiis, us, m. army.
Hostis, hostis, m. and f. enemy.
Impetus, us, m. attack.
In, prep. into with ace., in with abl.
Luscmia, ae, f. nightingale.
Occasus, us, ?n. the setting, as of the sun.
Post, prep, with ace. after.
Ver, veris, n. spring.
II. Translate into English.
1. Fructus, cantus. 2. Fructibus, cantibus. 3. Cantus
luscimae.1 4. Cantu lusciniae. 5. Cantibus lusciniarum.
6. Adventus veris. 7. Post adventum2 veris.1 8. Solis
occfisus. 9. Post solis occasum. 10. Caesaris adventu.
11. Ante adventum Caesaris. 12. Impetus nostrum. 13.
Impetu hostium. 14. In conspectu exercitus.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The army, the armies. 2. For the army, for the
armies. 3. Of the army, of the armies. 4. The arrival of
the army. 5. Before the arrival of the army. 6. After5
1 Genitive, according to Rule XVI. See p. 22.
2 Used with post, according to Rule XXXII. Sec p. 24.
3 Sec Rule XXXII. 432, p. 24. The pupil will remember that the
English prepositions, to, for, with, from, by, are generally rendered into
I>atin by merely putting the noun in the proper case, i.e. in the Dative
for to or for, and in the Ablative for with, from, by. Other English
] (repositions, before, after, behind, between, etc., are rendered into Latin
by corresponding Latin prepositions.
28 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
the arrival of the consul. 7. The singing of the night-
ingale. 8. After the setting of the sun. 9. Before the
attack of the enemy. 10. After the attack of the enemy.
*• FIFTH DECLENSION.
119. Nouns of the fifth declension end in es, —feminine,
and are declined as follows :
Dies, day.1 Res, thing. Case-Endings.
SINGULAR.
AT. dies res eS
G. die! rel el
D. die! rel ci
-•I. digm r£m Cm
I", dies § res es
-•1. die re e
PLURAL.
N. dies res es
<7. dittriim -rerikm eriim
Z). diefriis rebus ebiis
A. dies res es
K dies res es
-4. diefrii*. rebiis. ebiis.
1. Case-Endings. — Nouns of this declension are declined with
the case-endings placed on the right.
E in el is generally short when preceded by a consonant, other-
wise long.
"Jr 2. Examples for Practice-2 — Acies, battle-array; effigies, effigy;
fades, face ; series, series ; species, form ; spes, hope.
1 Dies, day, is an exception in Gender, as it is generally masculine,
though sometimes feminine in the singular.
2 Nouns of this declension, except dies and res, want, in the Plural,
the Genitive, Dative, and Ablative. These cases must, therefore, be
omitted in declining these examples.
ETYMOLOGY. — FIFTH DECLENSION.
29
COMPARATIVE VIEW OF THE TIVE DECLENSIONS.
121. Case-Endings of Latin nouns.1
SINGULAR.
Dec. I.
Dec
II. Dec. III.
Dec.
IV.
D.V.^
Fern.
Masc.,
Neut.
M. & F.
Neat.
Masc.
Neut.
Fern.'
N. a
us — 2
um
s(es,is)3
— e —
us
u
es
G. ae
i
5
Is
13
us
us
§1
D. ae
0
0
I
i
til
u
el
A. am
um
um
em (im)
like nom.
iim
u
em
V. a
e —
um
like nom.
like nom.
us
u
es
A. a ;o
o
e(I)
« (i) jii
u
e
PLURAL.
N. ae 1
*
5s
a (ia)
us
ua
es
0'. ariim oriim
oriim
um (ium]
um (ium)
uum
uum
erum
D. 13
is
13
ibus
ibus
ibus (ubus)
Ibus (ubus)
ebus
^1. as
OS
a
es
a(ia)
us
ua
es
V. ae
1
a
es
us
ua
es
vl. is.
Is
is.
Ibus
ibus.
Ibus (ubus)
ibus (ubus). ebiis
EXERCISE XI.
I. Vocabulary.
Acies, aciel, /.
battle-array, army.
Amlcus, I, m.
friend.
Cibus, I, m.
food.
T)Q,prep. icilli all.
concerning.
Dies, diel, m. and /.
'day.
Facies, faciei, f.
face, appearance.
Numerus, I, m.
number, quantity.
Res, rei, f.
thing, affair.
Species, specie!, f.
appearance.
Spes, spel, /.
hope. .v ,
Victoria, ae, /.
}
victory.
1 This table presents the endings of all nouns in the Latin language,
except a few derived from the Greek.
2 The dash denotes that the case-ending is sometimes wanting : cr and
»V in Dec. II., it will be remembered, are not case-endings, but parts of
the stem (45, 1).
3 The enclosed endings are less common than the others.
30 IXTKODTJCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. Translate into English.
1. Diei, dierum, diebus. 2. Aciei, aciem, acie. 3. Diem,
speciem. 4. Die, specie. 5. Res, spes. 6. Rei, spei. 7.
Victoriae spes. 8. Victoriae spe. 9. Diei horae. 10.
Numerus dierum. 11. Gloria, cibus, nubes, cantus, facies.
t!2. Gloriae, cibi, nubis, cantus, faciei. 13. Gloriam, cibum,
nubem, cantum, faciem.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. A day, days. 2. Of the day, of the days. 3. For the
day, for the days. 4. The thing, the things. 5. With the
thing, with the things. 6. Concerning the thing, concern-
ing the things. 7.. Of the thing, of the things. &. Con-
cerning the battle-array. 9. Wisdom, friend, citizen, fruit,
hope. 10. For wisdom, for a citizen, for hope.
C H A P T E K II.
ADJECTIVES.
146. The adjective is that part of speech which is used
to qualify nouns : bonus, good ; magnus, great.
The form of the adjective in Latin depends in part upon the
gender of the noun which it qualifies ; bonus puer, a good boy ; bona
puella, a good girl ; bonum tectum, a good house. Thus bonus is the
form of the adjective when used with masculine nouns, bona with
feminine, and bonum with neuter.
147. Some adjectives are partly of the first declension
and partly of the second, while all the rest are entirely of
the third declension.
I. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
148. Adjectives of this class have in the nominative
singular the endings :
ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES.
31
Masc., Dec. II.
Fern., Dec. I. Neut., Dec. II.
US 1 ,
a,
uin.
ey are declined
as follows :
Bonus, good.
SINGULAR.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Norn, boniis
bona
boniini
Gen. bonl
bonae
boni
Dat. bono
bonae
bono
Ace. boniiiii
bonam
boniini
Foe. bon£
bona
bonii.ni
Abl. . bono
bona
bono ;
PLURAL.
Nom. boni
bonae
bona
Gen. bonOrttm
bonariiHi
bonoriiiu
Dat. bonls
bonls
bonl*
^4cc. bonos
bonas
bona
Foe. bonl
bonae
bona
Abl bonls
bonls
bonls.
Liber, free.
SINGULAR.
Nom. liber
libera
llberiim
Gen. libSrl
liberae
libgri
Dat. libero
liberae
lib^ro
Ace. liberuiii
libCraii!
liberiini
Voc. liber
libtfra
libSriim
Abl. libero
libera
lib^ro ;
PLURAL
Nom. liberl
liberae
libSrii
Gen. liberoriiBai
L liberariim.
libero riini
Dat. libSrls
libdrls
Iib6rls
^4cc. liberos
liberas
libSra
Voc. liberl
liberae
libera
All. liberls
liberls
liberls.
1 The dash indicates that the ending is sometimes wanting. See 45, 1.
32 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Aeger, sick.
SINGULAR.
Masc. Fern. Neut.
Nom. aeger aegr& aegriim
Gen. aegrl aegrae aegrl
Dai. aegro aegrae aegro
Ace. aegrii.m aegr&m aegriim
Foe. aeger aegra, aegriim
Abl. aegro aegra aegro 5
PLURAL.
Nom. aegrl aegrae aegr&
Gen. aegrorum aegrariim aegrOr&m
Dat. aegrls aegrls aegris
Ace. aegros aegras aegra
Foe. aegrl aegrae aegra
Abl. aegrls aegrls aegrls.
1. Bonus is declined in the Masc. like servus of Dec. II. (45), in
the Fern, like mensa of Dec. I. (42), and in the Neut. like templum
of Dec. II. (45),
2. Liber differs in declension from bonus only in dropping us and
c in the Nom. and Voc. (45, 3, 1). Aeger differs from liber only in
dropping e before r (45, 3, 2).
3. Most adjectives in er are declineJl like aeger.
RULE XXXIII — Agreement of Adjectives.
438. An Adjective agrees with its Noun in GENDER,
NUMBER, and CASE :
Fortuna caeca est, Fortune is blind.1 Cic. Verae amicitiae, true
friendships. Cic. Magister optimus, the best teacher. Cic.
1 Here the adjective caeca is in the feminine gender, in the singular
number, and in the nominative case, to agree withfortuna. It is declined
like BONUS : caecus, caeca, caecum.
ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES.
33
MODEL FOR PAUSING.
Verae amlcitiae, True friendships.
Verae is an adjective (146) of the First and Second Declensions
(147) : STEM, ver (41, 148, 1). Singular: N. verus, vera, verum; G.
veri, verae, veri ; D. vero, verae, vero ; A. verum, veram, verum ; V.
vere, vera, verum ; A. vero, vera, vero. Plural : N. veri, verae, vera ;
G. verorum, ver arum, verorum; D. ver is, veris, veris ; A. veros, veras,
vera ; V'. veri, verae, vera ; A. veris, veris, veris. It is in the Nomi-
native Plural Feminine, and agrees with its noun amicitiae, accord-
ing to Rule XXXLTI : " An Adjective agrees with its Noun in GEN-
DER, NUMBER, and CASE."
EXERCISE XII.
I. Vocabulary.
Anniilus, I, m.
Aureus, a, iim,1
Beatus, a, um,
Bonus, a, iim,
Egregiiis, a, iim,
Fldus, a, tim,
Gratus, a, um,
Magnus, a, iim,
Multus, a, iim,
Puella, ae, /.
Pulcher, pulchra, pulchriim,
Regina, ae, f.
Regniim, I, n.
Veriis, a, iim,
Vita, ae, /.
ring.
golden.
happy, blessed.
good.
distinguished.
faithful.
acceptable, pleasing.
great.
much, many.
girl.
beautiful.
queen.
kingdom.
true.
life.
1 The endings a and um belong respectively to the feminine and to the
neuter. Thus aureus, aurea, aureum, like bonus, 148.
34 INTRODUCTORY LATIN" BOOK.
II. Translate, into English.
1. Armcus fidus.1 2. Amicifidi. 3. Amlcofido. 4. Ami-
cum fidum. 5. Amice fide. 6. Amicorum fidorum. 7. Ami-
cis fidis. 8. Amlcos fidos. 9. Corona aurea. 10. Coronae
aureae. 11. Coronam auream. 12. Corona, aurea. 13.
Coronarum aurearum. 14. Coronis aureis. 15. Coronas
aureas. 16. Donum gratum. 17. Doni grati. 18. Dono
grato. 39. Dona grata. 20. Donorum gratorum. 21.
Donis gratis. 22. Ager pulcher. 23. Puella pulchra, 24.
Donum pulchrum. 25. Agri pulchri. 26. Puellae pul-
chrae. 27. Dona pulchra. 28. Beata vita, 29. Aureus
annulus. 30. Aurei annuli. 31. Magna gloria. 32. Egre-
gia victoria.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. A true 2 friend. 2. The true 2 friends. 3. Fora true
friend. 4. For true friends. 5. Of the true friend. 6.
Of true friends. 7. True glory. 8. With true glory. 9.
Of true glory. 10. An acceptable word. 11. Acceptable
words. 12. With acceptable words. 13. Of acceptable
words. 14. A beautiful book. 15. The beautiful books.
16. With a beautiful book. 17. Of beautiful books. 18.
The beautiful queen. 19. The crown of the • beautiful
queen. 20. The beautiful crown of the queen. 21. A
good king, a good queen, a good kingdom. 22. The broth-
ers of the good king.
1 In Latin the adjective generally follows its noun, as in this example;
though sometimes it precedes it, as in English. When emphatic, the
adjective is placed before its noun ; as, Verae amicitiae, true friendships.
Fidas agrees with amicus, according to Eule XXXIII.
2 Be sure and put the adjective in the right form to agree with its
noun, according to Rule XXXIII.
ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES.
35
H. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
150. Adjectives of the third declension may be divided
into three classes :
I. Those which have in the nominative singular three
different forms, — one for each gender.
II. Those which have two forms, — the masculine and
feminine being the same.
III. Those which have but one form, — the same for all
genders.
151. I. ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDLSTGS of this declen-
sion have in the nominative singular :
Masc.
er,
Fern.
is,
They are declined as follows :
Neut.
e.
Acer, sharp.
SINGULAR.
Masc.
Fern.
Neat.
JV. acer
acris
acre
G. acris
acris
acris
D. acrl
acrl
acrl
A. acrem
acrem.
acr£
V. acer
acris
acre
A. acrl
acrl
acrl ;
N. acres
G. acrlikm
D. acritoiis
A. acres
V. acres
A. acrlbits
PLURAL.
acres
acrliim
acri"biis
acres
acres
acrlbiks
acriiim
acritoiis
acriti
acria,
acril>iis.
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
152. II. ADJECTIVES OF Two ENDINGS have in
nominative singular:
M. and F. Neut.
1. is e, for positives.
2. ior (or) ius (us), for comparatives.
They are declined as follows :
Tristis, sad. Tristior, more sad.1
the
SINGULAR.
M. and F.
Neut.
M. and F.
Neut.
N. tristis
tristl
N. tristior
tristiiis
G. tristis
tristis
G. tristioris
tristioris
D. tristl
tristl
D. tristiorl
tristiorl
A. tristem
tristl
A. tristior ein.
tristiiis
V. tristis
tristl
V. tristior
tristius
A. tristl
tristl ;
A. tristior e" (I)
tristiorl (l) ;
PLURAL.
N. tristes
tristiai
N. tristior es
tristior si,
G, tristiitm
tristiii.111
G. tristiorikin.
tristiorii-in
D. tristlbiis
tristlbiis
D. tristioril>iis
tristiorilJU-S
A. tristes
tristifc
A. tristiores
tristiorS,
V. trist^s
tristia.
V. tristiores
tristiorii
A. tristitoiks
tristitoiis.
A. tristioril>tjLS
tristiorit>iis.
153. III. ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. — All other ad-
jectives have but one form in the nominative singular for
all genders. They generally end in s or a, sometimes in I
or r, and are declined in the main like nouns of the same
endings. The following are examples :
Felix,
happy.
Prudens,
pnulent.
SINGULAR.
M. and F.
Neut.
M. and F.
Neut,
N. iclix
felix
N.
prudens
prudens
G. fcllcis
felicis
G.
prudentis
prudentis
D. felicl
felicl
D.
prudent!
prudentl
A. felicem
felix
A.
prudentem.
prudens
V. felix
felix
V.
prudens
prudens
A. felled (I)
felice* (I) ; A.
prudent^ (1)
prudente (I) ;
l
Comparative.
See 1GO.
ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES.
37
PLURAL.
AT. fellces
felicisi
N. prudentes
prudenti^
G. feliciiim
feliciiim
G. prudentiikm
prudentiiim
D. felicil>iis
felicil>iis
D. prudentil>iis
prudentil>iis
A. fellces
feliciii
A. prudentes
prudenti^
F fellces
feliciii
V prudentes
prudent!^
A. felicifriks
fellcil>iis.
A. prudentlbits
prudentlbiis.
EXERCISE XIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Acer, acris, acre,
sharp, severe.
Animal, animalis, 11.
animal.
Brevis, e,
short, brief.
Crudelis, e,
cruel.
Dolor, doloris, in.
pain, grief.
Dux, duels, m.
leader.
Fertilis, e,
fertile.
Fortis, e,
brave.
Navalis, e,
naval.
Omnis, e,
every, all, whole.
Pugna, ae, f.
battle.
Sapiens, sapientis,
wise.
Singularis, e,
singular, remarkable.
Utilis, e,
useful.
II. Translate into English.
1. Dolor acer. 2. Dolores acres. 3. Lex acris. 4. Leg-
ibus acribus. 5. Hostis crudelis. 6. Hostem crudelem.
7. Miles fortis. 8. Virtus militis1 fortis. 9. Virtute mili-
tum1 fortium. 10. Ager fertilis. 11. In agro fertili. 12.
Agros fertiles. 13. In agris fertilibus. 14. Post vitam
brevem. 15. Pugnae navales. 16. Post pugnas navales.
17. Singularis virtus. 18. Singular! virtute. 19. Omne
animal. 20. Omnia animalia.
i Genitive, according to Rule XYT.
38 INTIIODUCTOKY LATIN BOOK.
III. Translate into Latin.
I. A useful citizen. 2. Of useful citizens. 3. For a
useful citizen. 4. For useful citizens. 5. Of a useful citi-
zen. 6. The wise judge. 7. Wise judges. 8. For the
wise judge. 9. For wise judges. 10. Brave soldiers. 11.
For brave soldiers. 12. A brave soldier. 13. Of the brave
soldier. 14. The brave leader. 15. Brave leaders. 16.
The word of the brave leader. 17. By the words of the
brave leader.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
160. Adjectives have three forms to denote different
degrees of quality. They are usually called the Positive,
the Comparative, and the Superlative degree : altus, altior,
altisslmus? high, higher, highest.
Comparatives and superlatives are sometimes best rendered into
English by too and very, instead of more and most: doctus, learned;
doctior, more learned, or too learned ; doctissimus, most learned, or
very learned.
161. The Latin, like the English, has two modes of
comparison :
I. Terminational Comparison — by endings.
II. Adverbial Comparison — by adverbs.
I. TEEMINATIONAL COMPARISON.
162. Adjectives are regularly compared by adding to
the stem of the positive the endings :
Comparative. Superlative.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
ior, ior, ius. issimus, issima, issimum.
xEach of these forms of the adjective is declined. Thus altus and
altissimus are declined like bonus, 148: ahus, a, um; altl, ae, i, etc. ; altis-
simus, a, urn ; altissimi, ae, i, etc. Alt ior is declined like tristior, 1 52 : altior,
uhitis : nlf.foris, etc.
ETYMOLOGY. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 39
EXAMPLES.
Altus, altior, altissimus: high, higher, higJiest.
levis, levior, levissimus : light, lighter, lightest.
II. ADVERBIAL COMPARISON.
170. Adjectives which want the terminational compari-
son form the comparative and superlative, when their sig-
nification requires it, by prefixing the adverbs magis, more,
and maxime, most, to the positive :
Arduus, magis arduus, maxime arduus.
Arduous, more arduous, most arduous.
MODEL FOR PARSING.
^Urator clarior, A more renowned orator.
Clarior is an adjective (146) in the Comparative degree (160,
162), from the positive clarus, which is of the First and Second
Declensions (148). Positive, clarus; STEM, clar ; Comparative, cla-
rior; Superlative, clarissimus. Clarior is an adjective of the Third
Declension, declined like tristior (152). Singular : N. clarior, clarius;
G. claridris, clarions, etc.1 It is in the Nominative Singular Mascu-
line, and agrees with its noun orator, according to Rule XXXIII.2
EXERCISE XIV.
I. Vocabulary.
Altus, a, iim, high, lofty.
Clarus, a, iim, distinguished, renowned.
Inter, prep, with ace. among, in the midst of.
Mons, montls, m. mountain.
\^ II. Translate into English.
x^x.
1. OrutOT clarus. 2. Orator clarior. 3 3. Orator claris-
simus. 4. Oratures clari. 5. Oratores clariores.3 6. Ora-
1 Decline through all the cases of both numbers,
2 Give the Rule.
3 Declined like tristior, 152. Comparatives and superlatives, as well as
positives, must agree with their nouns, according to Rule XXXIII. p. 32.
3
40
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
tores clarissimi. 7. Beata vita. 8. Beatior vita. 9. Bea-
tissima vita. 10. Donum gratum. 11. Donum gratius.
12. Donum gratissimum. 13. Dona grata. 14. Dona
gratiora. 15. Dona gratissima. 16. Milites fortissimi.
17. Liber utilis. 18. Libri utiliores. 19. Libris utilissi-
rais. 20. Mons altns. 21. Montes altiores.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. A fertile field. 2. A more fertile field. 3. The most
fertile field. 4. Fertile fields. 5. More fertile fields. 6.
A useful life. 7. A more useful life. 8. The most useful
life. 9. Useful lives. 10. More useful lives. 11. The
most useful lives. 12. A pleasing song. 13. A more
pleasing song. 14. The most pleasing song.
NUMERALS.
171. Numerals comprise numeral adjectives and nu-
meral adverbs.
I. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
172. Numeral adjectives comprise three principal
classes :
1. CARDINAL NUMBERS : * unus, one ; duo^ two.
2. ORDINAL NUMBERS : x primus^ first ; secundus, second.
3. DISTRIBUTIVES : * singuli, one by one ; blni, two by
two, two each, two apiece.
,-\__- ~TS
174. TABLE OF NUMERAL Aojia
^ "^ V^ ^***^
CARDINALS. -
^x'*"^
^ ORDINALS.
"N
DISTRIBUTIVES. ;
1. finite, unit, uniim, /
2. duo, duae, duo,
primtis, first,
sScundus, second,
singtili, one by one.
bmi, two by two.
;5. tres, triii,
tertius, third,
term (trim).
4. quattuor,
quartus, fourth,
quaterm.
5- quinque,
quintiis, fifth,
quini.
G. sex,
sextiis,
seni.
i Cardinals denote simply the number of objects : unus, one ; duo, two.
Ordinals denote the place of an object in a series: primus, first; secundus.
ETYMOLOGY. — NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
41
7. sept&n,
Septimus,
septeni.
8. octo,
octavus,
octuni.
9. novCm,
nonus,
noveni.
10. dgcSm,
dScimus,
deni.
11. undecim,
undecimus,
undeni.
12. duodecim,
duodecimos,
duodeni.
13. tredgcim, or de'cem Ct tres,
tertius decimus,
terni dem.
20. viginti,
vicesimtis,
viceni.
2, ( viginti uniis,
vicesimus primus,
vicem singuli.
" I uniis £t viginti,
uniis ^t vicesimus,
singuli et viceni
30. triginta,
tricesimtts,
triceni.
40. quadraginta,
quadragesimus,
quadrageni.
50. quinquaginta,
quinquagesimus,
quinquageni.
100. centum,
centesimus,
centeni.
200. ducenti, ae, a, i
dticentesimus,
duceni.
1000. milie, V
millesimus,
singiila milliS^
- — ^ — \r* —
•N-.OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
1. Cardinals.
1 75- On the declension of cardinals, observe,
1. That the units, unus, duo, and tres, are declined.
2. That the other units, all the tens, and centum^ are in
declinable.
3. That the hundreds are declined.3
4. That miUe is sometimes declined.2
176. The first three cardinals are declined as follows:
1. Untis, oiw.
Singular.
Plural
N. uniis,
una,
uniim,
uni,
unae,
una,
6r. unius,
unms,
unms,
unoriim,
unarum,
unoriim,
D. uni,
uni,
uni,
unis,
unis,
unis,
A. unum,
unam,
unum,
unos,
unas,
una,
V. une,
una,
uniim,
A. uno,
una,
uno;
unis,
unis,
unis.
second. Distributives denote the number of objects taken at a time: sin-
(juli, one by one ; llni, two by two.
1 These are declined like the plural of bonus (148) ; ducenti, ae, a, two
hundred.
2 Though only in the plural, and only when used substantively. It is
tiien declined like the plural of mare (50) ; millia, millium, milllbus.
4*2 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
2. Duo, two. 3. Tres, three.
N- duo,
duae,
duo,
tres, m.
and/.
tria, n.
G. duorum,
duartim,
duorum,
trium,
trium,
D. duobus,
duabtis,
duobus,
tribiis,
tribiis,
A. duos, duo,
duas,
duo,
- tres,
tria,,
A. duobus,
duabiis,
duobus.
tribiis,
tribGs.
EXERCISE XV.
I. Vocabulary.
Annus, i, m. year.
Classis, classis, /. fleet.
Fortitude, fortitudinis, /. fortitude, bravery.
Imperium, ii, n. reign, power.
Navis, navis, f. sliip.
Proeliiim, ii, n. battle.
Vir, vm, m. man, hero.
II. Translate into English.
1. Unus 1 liber. 2. Duo x libri. 3. Liber primus.1 4,
Liber secundus. 5. Tres libri. 6. Tertius liber. 7. Tria
bella. 8. Post tria bella. 9. Post tertium bellum. 10.
Ante quartum bellum. 11. Quattuor 2 anni. 12. Post bel-
lum quinque annorum. 13. Decem2 dies. 14. Decimus
dies.3 15. Decem horae. 16. Decima hora. 17. Decem
proeJia. 18. Decimum proelium. 19. Hora, diei decima.
III. Translate into Latin.
\. Five friends. 2. Of five friends. 3. The fifth year.
4. The fifth day. 5. The fifth present. 6. With five pres-
ents. 7. Eight books. 8. With eight books. 9. The
eighth book. 10. Before the eighth book. 11. The bra-
very of two soldiers. 12. By the bravefy of two soldiers.
1 Numeral adjectives agree with their nouns, like other adjectives.
2 The indeclinable numeral adjectives (175, 2) maybe used without
change of form with nouns of any gender, and in any case,
2 Dies, it will be remembered, is generally masculine.
ETYMOLOGY. PKOXOUNS. 43
CHAPTER III.
PRONOUNS. '
182. The Pronoun is that part of speech which prop-
erly supplies the place of nouns : ego, I ; tu, thou.
1 83. Pronouns are divided into six classes :
1. Personal Pronouns : tu, thou.
2. Possessive Pronouns : meus, my.
3. Demonstrative Pronouns : liic, this.
4. Relative Pronouns : qui, who.
5. Interrogative Pronouns : quis, who ?
6. Indefinite Pronouns : aUquis^ some one.
I. PERSONAL PKONOUNS.
184. Personal Pronouns, so called because they desig-
nate the person of the noun which they represent, are ego,
I ; tu, thou; sui (Nom. not used), of himself, herself, itself.
They are declined as follows :
SINGULAR.
N.
ego
tu
G.
mei
tul
sui
D.
mihi
tibi
sib!
A.
me
te
se
V.
tu
A.
me ;
te;
se;
PLURAL.
N.
nds
VOS
G.
nostrum 7
nostri j
vestrum )
yestri )
sui
D.
nobis
vobis
sib!
A.
nos
VOS
se
V.
VOS
A.
nobis.
vobls
se.
1. Substantive Pronouns. — Personal pronouns are also called Sub-
stantive pronouns, because they are always used as substantives.
2. Reflexive Pronoun. — Suirfrom its reflexive signification, of 1dm-
selfj etc., is often called the Reflexive pronoun.
44
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
185. From Personal pronouns are formed the Possess-
ives :
meus, ray,
tuns, thy, your,
suns, his, her, its,
noster, our.
vester, your.
suus, their.
They are declined as adjectives of the first and second
declensions ; 1 meus, mea, meum ; noster, nostra, nostrum :
but meus has in the vocative singular masculine generally
mi, sometimes meus.
III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
186. Demonstrative Pronouns, so called because they
specify the objects to which they refer, are
Hie, itte, iste, ipse, is, idem.
They are declined as follows :
Hie, this.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N. liic
haec
hoc
hi
liae
liaec
G. hujiis
hujiis
hujiis
lioriim
liariim
lioriim
D. hulc
hulc
hulc
his
Ins
lllS
A. hunc
hanc
hoc
hos
has
haec
V.
A. hoc
hac
hoc;
his
his
Ins.
Ille, he or that.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N. illc
ilia
illiid
illl
illae
ilia
G. illlus
illlus
illlus
illdrum
i liariim
illdriim
D. illl
illl
illl
illis
illis
illis
A. ilium
ilium
illiid
illos
illas
ilia
V.
A. illo
ilia
illo;
illis
illis
illis.
1 See bonus and aeger, 148.
ETYMOLOGY. PRONOUNS.
45
Iste, that.
Iste, that, is declined like itte. It usually refers to ob-
jects which are present to the person addressed, and some-
times expresses contempt.
Ipse, self, lie.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
J/;
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
A", ipse
ipsa
ipsum
ipsl
. ipsae
ipsa
G. ipsius
ipsius
ipsius
ipsoriim
ipsarum
ipsoriim
D. ipsl
ipsl
ipsl
ipsls
ipsls
ipsls
A. ipsum
ipsam
ipsum
ipsos
ipsas
ipsa
V. >
A. ipso
ipsa
ipso; -
ipsls
ipsls
ipsls.
SINGULAR.
Is, he, that.
PLURAL.
4-
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
^V. is
ea
id
ii
eae
ea
G. ejus
ejus
ejus
eoriim
ear urn
eoriim
D. el
el
el
iis (els)
iis (els)
iis (els)
A. eum
earn
id
eos
eas
ea
F.
^4. eo
ea
eo;
iis (els)
iis (els)
iis (els).
Idem, the same.
Idem, compounded of is and dem, is declined like is, but
shortens isdem to idem, and iddem to idem, and changes m
to n before the ending dem ; thus :
SINGULAR.
M. F. N.
N. Idem eadem idem
G. ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem
D. eidem eidem eidem
A. eundem eandem idSm
V.
A . eodem eadem eodem ;
PLURAL.
M. F. N.
ildem eaedem eadem
eorundem earundem eorundent
iisde'ra iisdem iisdem
eosdem easdem eadem
ii*dem
iisdem iisdem.
IV. RELATIVE PKONOUNS.
187. The Relative qui, who, so called because it relates
to some noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, called
its antecedent, is declined as follows :
1NTRODUCTOKY LATIN BOOK.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
N. qui
quae
quod
qui
quae
quae
G. cujiis
cujus
cujus
quorum
quaruni
quorum
D. cul
CUl
CUl
quibus
quibus
quibus
A . quern
V.
quam
quod
quos
quas
quae
A . quo
qua
qu5;
quibus
quibus
quibus.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL
F.
N.
M.
F.
N.
quae
cujus
cul
quam
quid
cujus
CUl
quid
qui
quorum
quibus
quos
quae
quariim
quibus
quas
quae
quorum
quibus
quae
qua
quo;
quibus
quibus
quibus.
Y. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
188. Interrogative Pronouns are used in asking ques-
tions. The most important are
Quis and qui, with their compounds.
Quis (who, which, what?) is generally used substan-
tive! y, and is declined as follows:
M,
N. quis
G. cujus
D. cul
A. quern
V.
A. quo
Qui (which, what?) is generally used adjectively, and is
declined like the relative qui.
VI. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
189. Indefinite Pronouns do not refer to any definite
persons or things. The most important are
Quis and qui, with their compounds.
. 190. Quis, any one, qui, any one, any, are the same in
form and declension as the interrogatives quis and qui.1
191. From quis and qui are formed
I. The Indefinites :
aliquis, aliqua, aliquld or aliquod, some, some one.
quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam or quodpiam, some, some one.
quidam, quaedam, quiddam or quoddam, certain, certain one.
quisquam, quidquam, any one.
1 But after si, nisi, ne, and num, the Feminine Singular and the Neuter
Plural have quae or qua; si quae, si qua. In like manner, allquu has
aliqua in the Feminine Singular and in the Neuter Plural.
ETYMOLOGY. — PHOXOUNS. 47
II. jT/i? General Indefinites :
quiscpe, quaeque, " quidque or quodquc. tvery, every one.
quivis, quacvis, quidvis or quodvis, any one you please.
quilibet, quaellbet, quidlibct or quodlib'ef, any one you please.
EXERCISE XVI.
I. Vocabulary.
Consilium, il, n. design, plan.
Epistola, ae, /. letter.
Ex, j9rep. with all. from.
Insula, ae, /. island.
Parens, parentis, r,i. and /. parent.
Pars, partis, /. part, portion.
Patria, ae, /. country, native country.
Praeclariis, a, iim, distinguished.
Pratutn, i, n. meadow.
Pro, prep, with dbl. for, in behalf of.
Qirivis, quaevls, quodvis, whoever, whatever.
II. Translate into English.
1. Mihi, tibi, sibi. 2. Ad me,1 ad te. 3. Contra nos,
contra se. 4. Ante vos, ante nos. 5. Pro vobis.1 G.
Mea 2 vita. 7. Patria tua. 8. Pro patria tua.2 9. Con-
tra patriam tuam. 10. Nostra consilia. 11. Nostris2 con-
siliis. 12. Vestri patres. 13. In nostra patria. 14. Hie2
puer, hi pueri. ~^>. Haec corona, hae coronae. 16. Hoc
donum, liaec dona. 17. Haec nrbs praeclara. 18. Ex liac
vita. 19. Illius libri. 20. In ea pugna. 21. In eodem.
prato. 22. Quac2 urbs?
1 Sec 184, 1. Substantive pronouns are used in the several cases like
nouns, and are parsed by the same rules. Sec Eule XXXII. 432. Other
pronouns are sometimes used as nouns, and parsed in the same way.
2 The Possessive, the Demonstrative, and the Interrogative pronouns, in
this exercise, are all used as adjectives, and agree with their nouns, like
any other adjectives, according to Rule XXXIII. 438, p. 32. Hence mea
is in the Nominative Singular Feminine, to agree with vita; nostris, in
the Dative or Ablative Plural Neuter, to agree with consiliis ; hie, in the
Nominative Singular Masculine, to agree with pucr,
\
48 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. We, you. 2. You, me, himself. 3. For you, for me,
.for himself. 4. Of .himself, of you. 5. Against ~ you,
against me. 6. My book, your book, his book. 7. My
books, your books, his books. 8. Our parents, your par-
ents, their parents. 9. This letter, that letter* 10. These
letters, those letters. 11* This city, a that city* > 12. These
cities, those cities. 13. After that victory. 14. The same
words. 15. With the same words.
CHAPTER IV.
VERBS.
192. Verbs in Latin, as in English, express existence,
condition, or action : est, he is ; dormit, he is sleeping ;
legit, he reads.
1 93. Verbs comprise two principal classes :
I. TRANSITIVE VERBS, — which admit a direct object
of their action : servum l verberat, he beats the slave.
II. INTRANSITIVE VERBS, — which do not admit such
an object : puer currit, the boy runs.
194. Verbs have Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, and
Person.
I. VOICES.
1 95. There are two Voices : 2
I. THE ACTIVE VOICE, — which represents the subject
as acting or existing : pater filium amat, the father loves
his son ; est, he is.
1 Here servum, the slave, is the direct object of the action denoted by
the verb beats: beats (what?) the slave.
2 Voice shows whether the subject acts (Active Voice), or is acted upon
(Passive Voice).
BTYMOLOGY. VERBS. 49
II. THE PASSIVE VOICE, — which represents the sub-
ject as acted upon by some other person or thing: filius a
patre amdtur, the son is loved by his father.
II. MOODS.
196. Moods1 are either Definite or Indefinite:
I. The Definite or Finite Moods make up the Finite
Verb ; they are :
1. The INDICATIVE MOOD, — which either asserts some-
thing as SL fact, or inquires after the fact : legit, he is read-
ing ; leyitne, is he reading ?
2. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, — which expresses, not an
actual fact, but a possibility or conception, often rendered
by may, can, etc. : Ugat, he may read, let him read.
3. The IMPERATIVE MOOD, — which expresses a com-
mand or an entreaty : lege, read thou.
II. The Indefinite Moods express the meaning of the
verb in the form of nouns or adjectives ; they are:
1. The INFINITIVE, — which, like the English Infinitive,
gives the simple meaning of the verb, without any neces-
sary reference to person or number : legere, to read.
2. The GERUND, — which gives the meaning of the verb
in the form of a verbal noun of the second declension, used
only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singu-
lar. It corresponds to the English participial noun in ING :
amandi, of loving ; amandi causa, for the sake of loving.
3. The SUPINE, — which gives the meaning of the verb
in the form of a verbal noun of the fourth declension, used
only in the accusative and ablative singular : amdtum, to
love, for loving ; amatu, to be loved, in loving.
4. The PARTICIPLE, — which, like the English Participle,
gives the meaning of the verb in the form of an adjective.
1 Mood, or Mode, means manner, and relates to the manner in which
the meaning of the verb is expressed, as will be seen by observing the
force of the several Moods.
60 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BQOIv.
A Latin verb may have four participles : two in the Active, the
Present and Future, — amans, loving ; amaturus, about to love :
and two in the Passive, the Perfect and Future, — amdtus, loved ;
amandus, deserving to be loved.
III. TENSES.
1 97. There are six tenses : l
I. THREE TENSES FOR INCOMPLETE ACTION:
1. Present : amo^ I love.
2. Imperfect : amabam, I was loving.
3. Future : amabo, I shall love.
II. THREE TENSES FOR COMPLETED ACTION:
1. Perfect : amavi^ I have loved, I loved.
2. Pluperfect : amaveram, I had loved.
3. Future Perfect : amavero, I shall have loved.
198. REMARKS ON TENSES.
1. Present Perfect and Historical Perfect. — The Latin Perfect
sometimes corresponds to our Perfect with have (have loved), and
is called the Present Perfect, or Perfect Definite ; and sometimes to
our Imperfect or Past (loved), and is called the Historical Perfect,
or Perfect Indefinite.
2. Principal and Historical. — Tenses are also distinguished as
1) Principal: — Present, Present Perfect, Future, and Future
Perfect.
2) Historical : — Imperfect, Historical Perfect, and Pluperfect.
3. Tenses Wanting. — The Subjunctive wants the Future and
Future Perfect ; the Imperative has only the Present and Future ;
the Infinitive, only the Present, Perfect, and Future.
IV. NUMBERS.
1 99. There are two Numbers : 2 SINGULAR and PLURAL.
1 Tense means time, and is employed to designate the time of an action
or event.
2 Number in verbs corresponds, it will be observed, to number in nouns,
Sen 37.
ETYMOLOGY. VERBS. 51
Y. PERSONS.
200. There arc three Persons:1 FIRST, SECOND, and
THIRD.
CONJUGATION.
201. Regular verbs are inflected, or conjugated, in four
different ways, and are accordingly divided into Four Con-
jugations, distinguished from each other by the
INFINITIVE ENDINGS.
Conj. I. Conj. II. Conj. III. Conj. IV.
are, ere, ere, ire.
202. Principal Parts. — Four forms of the verb — the
Present Indicative, Present Infinitive, Perfect Indicative,
and Supine 2 — are called, from their importance, the Prin-
cipal Parts of the verb.
203. Entire Conjugation. — In any regular verb,
1. The VERB-STEM may be found by dropping the In-
finitive Ending: amare / stem, am.
2. The PRINCIPAL PARTS may be formed from this stem
by means of proper endings.
3. The ENTIRE CONJUGATION of the verb through all its
parts may be readily formed from these Principal Parts by
means of the proper endings.3
1 Person in verbs corresponds, it will be observed, to person in nouns.
Sec 37.
2 In the Active Voice, all these four forms are usually given as Princi-
pal Parts ; but, in the Passive, .only the first three.
3 In the Paradigms of regular verbs, the endings, both those which
distinguish the Principal Parts and those which distinguish the forms
derived from those parts, are separately indicated, and should be carefully
noticed.
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
204. Sum, lam.
Sum is used as an auxiliary in the passive voice of regular verbs.
Accordingly, its conjugation, though quite irregular, must be given
at the outset.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Incl.
sum, esse, • fui,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
/ am.
Supine.
1
turn,
es,
cst,
tram,
eras,
erat,
t-rd,
eris,
crir,
SINGULAR.
I am,
thou art?
Tie is;
IMPE
7t
I was,
thou wast,
he was ;
FUT
/ shall o
I shall be,
thou icilt be,
lie will be;
PERI
sumus,
estis,
sunt,
RFECT.
cos.
eramus,
eratis,
erant,
[JRE.
r will be.
erimus,
eritis,
erant,
^ECT.
PLURAL.
we are,
you are,
they are.
ice were,
you were,
they 10 ere.
we shall be,
you will be,
they will be.
/ have been, was.
fui,
faistl,
Cult.,
I have been,
thou hast been,
he has been;
fulmus,
fuistis,
fuSrunt, )
fuere, )
ive have been,
you have been,
they have been.
•
PLUPERFECT.
/ had been.
fueram,
fueras,
fuer at,
J had been,
thou hadst been,
he had been;
FUTURE
fu eramus,
fueratis,'
fuerant,
PERFECT.
. we had been,
you had been, .
they had been.
J shall or will have been.
fuerf),
fneris,
fuerlt,
I shall have been,
thou wilt have been,
he will have been ;
fu erimus,
fueritis,
fuerint,
we shall have been,
you will have been,
they will have been.
1 The Supine is wanting in this verb.
2 Or, you, are : thou is confined mostly to solemn discourse : in ordinary
English, you are is used both in the singular and in the plural.
ETYMOLOGY. VEKB SUM.
53
cssSm,
esses,
esset,
fuerim,
fueris,
fuerlt,
fuissem,
fuisses,
fuisset,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
/ may or can be.1
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
slm,
ElS,
lit,
/ may be,
thou mayst be,
he may be ;
1 simus,
1 SltlS,
1 sint,
we may be,
you may be,
they may be.
IMPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should be.
I miyht be,
thou mightst be,
he might be ;
essemus,
essetis,
essent,
PERFECT.
/ may or can have been.
I may have been,
thou mayst have been,
he may have been ;
fuerlmus,
fueritis,
fuerint,
we might be,
you might be,
they might be.
we may have been,
you may have been,
they may have been.
PLUPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should have been.
I might have been,
thou mightst have been,
he might have been;
fuissemus, we might have been,
fuissetis, you might have been,
fuissent, they might have been.
I M P E 11 A T I Y E.
PRES. 6s,
FUT. esto,
est5,
be thou,
thou shalt be,-
he shall be;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. essc,
PERF. fuisse,
to be.
to have been.
FUT. futuriis 3 essc, to be about tobe.
este, be ye.
estote, ye shall be,
suiitS, they shall be.
PARTICIPLE.
FUT. futuriis,5 about to be.
1 The Subjunctive is sometimes best rendered by let: sit, he maybe,
may he be, let him be.
2 The Future is sometimes best rendered like the Present, or with let:
csto, thou shah be, or be thou ; sunto, they shall be, or let them be.
3 Futurus is declined like bonus; N. faturus, a, urn, G. futuri, ae, i; so
in the Infinitive : faturus, a, um esse.
54 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
BULE XXXV. — Verb with Subject.
460. A Finite1 Verb agrees with its Subject2 in
NUMBER and PERSON:
Deus nmndum aedificavit,3 God made the world. Cic. Ego reges
ejeci, vos tjrannos introducitis, I have banished kings, you introduce
tyrants. Cic.
1. PARTICIPLES IN COMPOUND TENSES. — These agree with the
subject, according to Rule XXXIII. page 32:
Thebani accusati sunt,4 The Thebans were accused. Cic.
2. SUBJECT OMITTED. — The subject is generally omitted —
1) When it is a Personal Pronoun, or can be readily supplied
from the context :
Discipulos moneo,5ut stiidia ament,5 / instruct pupils to love6 their
studies. Quint.
1 Sec 196, I.
2 With 4ho Active Voice of a Transitive Verb, the Subject represents
iho person (or thing, one or more) who performs the action ; as, Dens
in the first example, God made: but, with the Passive Voice, it represents
the person (or thing, one or more) who receives the action, i.e. is acted
upon, as, Tkebdnif 460, 1 : the Thebans were accused.
3 Aedificavit is in the Third Person and in the Singular Number, be-
cause its subject deus is in that person and number. Ejeci is in the First
Person Singular, to agree with its subject ego; and introducitis in the
Second Person Plural, to agree with its subject vos.
4 The verb accusati sunt is in the Third Person Plural, to agree with
its subject Thebani, according to Rule XXXV. ; but the participle
accusati, which is one element of the verb, is in the Nominative Plural
Masculine, to agree with its noun Thebani, according to Rule XXXIII.
6 The subject of moneo is ego. It is omitted, because it is a Personal
Pronoun, and is, accordingly, fully implied in the verb, as the ending eo
shows, as we shall soon see, that the subject cannot be you, he, or they,
but must be 7.
Ul — ament means literally that they may love. The subject of ament is tho
pronoun ii, they, referring to discipulos. It is omitted, partly because
it is implied in the ending ent, but more especially because it can be so
readily supplied from discipulos, which shows who are here meant by they
G To love, or, more literally, that they may love.
ETYMOLOGY. VERB SUM. 55
The Pronoun may be expressed for emphasis or contrast, as in
the second example under the rule.
I. DIRECTIONS FOR PARSING VERBS.
In parsing a verb,
1. Tell whether it is transitive or intransitive (193),
name the Conjugation to which it belongs, give the Pres-
ent Indicative Active and the Stem (203).
2. Give the Principal Parts (202), and inflect the tense
in which the given form is found.1
3. Give the voice, mood, tense, number, and person.
4. Name the subject, and give the Rule for agreement.
MODELS FOR PARSING THE VERB SUM.
1. Sum with Subject.
ISTos2 eramus, We were.
Eramus is an intransitive irregular3 verb, from sum. Principal
Parts : sum, esse,fui, 4. Inflection of tense (Imperfect Indica-
tive) : eram, eras, eral, eramus, erdtis, erant. The form eramus is
found in the Indicative mood, Imperfect tense, First person, Plural
number, and agrees with its subject nos, according to Rule XXXV. :
" A Finite Verb agrees with its Subject in NUMBER and PERSON."
2. Sum loithout Subject.5
Fui, I have been.
Fui is an intransitive irregular verb, from sum. Principal Parts :
sum, esse, fui. Inflection of tense (Perfect Indicative) : fui, faisti,
1 That is, if the form occurs in a given tense of the Indicative, give
the several forms for the different persons and numbers in that tense and
mood. The teacher may also find it convenient to require the synopsis
of the mood till the required tense is found.
2 Nos is the Subject. With an intransitive verb, the Subject represents
the person (or thing) who is in the condition, or state, denoted by the
verb.
3 Hence it does not belong to cither of the regular conjugations.
4 The Supine is wanting.
6 That is, without any subject expressed.
56 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
fuit ; fuimus, fuistis, fuerunt, or fuere. The form ful is found in
the Indicative mood, Perfect tense, First person, Singular number,
and agrees with its subject ego omitted (though fully implied1 in the
ending { of fui), according to Rule XXXY.
EXERCISE XVII.
I. Translate into English.
1. Sum, sumus, sunt.2 2. Es, est, estis. 3. Eram, era-
mus.2 4. Erat, erant. 5. Eris, eritis.2 6. Erit, erunt.
7. Fui, fueram, fuero. 8. Fuimus, fueramus, fuermius.
9. Fuisti, fuistis. 10. Fuit, fuerunt. 11. Fuerat, fuerant.
12. Fuerit, fuerint. 13. Sim, simus. 14. Sit, sint. 15.
Essem, esseimis. 16. Esset, essent. IT. Fuerim, fuissem.
18. Fuerimus, fuissemus. 19. Fuerit, fuerint. 20. Fuisset,
fuisscnt. 21. Es, estc.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He3 is, they3 are. 2. He has been, they have been.
3. He will be, they will be. 4. He was, they were. 5. He
will have been, they will have been. 6. He had been,
they had been. 7. I s was, you were. 8. We have been,
you have been. 9. You may be, they may be. 10. He
would be, they would be. 11. I might have been, we
might have been.
1 Sec Rule XXXY., 2, together with the note.
2 In parsing the forms contained in this Exercise, observe the second
Model just given. If the verb is of the first person, supply, as subject,
the personal pronoun (184) of the first person; i.e., ego for the singular,
and nos for the plural. If the verb is of the second person, supply the
personal pronoun of the second person ; i.e., ta for the singular, and vos
for the plural. If the verb is of the third person, supply the demonstra-
tive pronoun is (186) for the singular, and ii for the plural, as the per-
sonal pronoun sui is not used in the Nominative : hence, ego sum, nos
sumus, ii sunt.
. 3 The English pronouns in this Exercise arc not to be rendered by the
corresponding Latin pronouns, as the latter may be implied in the ending
of the verb, as in the Latin forms above : hence, he is = est.
ETYMOLOGY. VERB SUM. 57
SUM WITH SUBJECT AND ADJECTIVE.
RULE III — Subject Nominative.
367. The Subject of a Finite1 Yerb is put in the
Nominative :
Servius2 regnavit, Servius reigned. Liv. Patent portae, The
rjates are open. Cic. Rex vlcit, The king conquered. Liv.
1. The Subject is always a substantive,, a pronoun, or some word
or clause used substantively :
Ego reges cjeci, / have banished kings. Cic.
2. SUBJECT OMITTED. See 460, 2 ; page 54.
MODEL FOE PARSING SUBJECTS.
Rex vicit, The king conquered.
Hex is a noun (31) of tlie Third Declension, as it has is in the
Genitive Singular (40) ; of Class I., as it ha» a nominative ending s
(x = g-s, of which s is the ending, as g belongs to the stem. See
50, 1. note) ; STEM, reg. Singular : rex, regis, regi, regem, rex, rege.
Plural : reges, regum, regibus, reges, reges, regibus. It is of the Mas-
culine gender, by 35, 1. 1. ; is in the Nominative Singular; and is
the subject of vicit, according to Rule III. : " The Subject of a
Finite Yerb is put in the Nominative."
EXERCISE XVIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Cato, Catonis, m. Cato, a distinguished Roman.
Crudus, a, iim, unripe.
Diligens, Dlligentis, diligent.
Discipulus, I, m. pupil.
1 Sec 196, 1.
2 In these examples, the subjects arc Servius, portae, and rex.
58 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Germania, ae, /. Germany.
Jucundiis, a, uin. pleasant, delightful.
Laudabilis, e. praiseworthy, laudable
Maturiis, a, iim. ripe.
Pomiim, i, n. fruit.
II. Translate into English.
1. Pax1 jucunda2 est.3 2. Pax jucunda erit. 3. Vita
brevis est. 4. Cato bonus fuit. 5. Gives boni fuerunt.
6. Virtus laudabilis es-t. 7. Libri utiles sunt. 8. Illi libri
utiles erunt. 9. Ille liber utilis fuerat. 10. Utilis4 fuisti.
11. Utiles fuistis. 12. Germania fertllis est. 13. Agrifer-
tiles fuerant. 14. Pomum crudum est. 15. Poma cruda
sunt. 16. Poma matura erunt. 17. Miles fortis est. 18.
Milites fortes sunt.
III. Translate into T^atin.
1. Tlie pupil is diligent.5 2. The pupils were diligent.
3. The boy is good. 4. He will be happy. 5. Good boys
are happy. C. You may be happy. 7. We might have
been happy. 8. This soldier will be useful. 9. These sol-
diers have been useful. 10. Brave soldiers arc useful.
11. You will be useful. 12. Let us be useful.
1 Pax is the subject of est, and is therefore in the Nominative, accord-
ing to Rule III.
2 Jucunda is an adjective in the Nominative Singular Feminine, to
iigroe with its noun pax, according to Rule XXXIII., page 32.
3 Est is a verb in the Indicative mood, Present tense, Third person,
Singular number, and agrees with its subject pax, according to Rule
ZXXV., page 54.
••' Utilis agrees with the omitted subject tut implied in the ending of tltf
verb,
5 In translating English into Latin, the pupil is expected, in the ar^
rangcment of words, to imitate the order followed in the Latin Exercises,
lie will observe that the subject stands first, and the verb last. But some-
times the verb precedes one or more words in the sentence. Thus the
sentence, Pax jucunda est, might be Pax est jucunda.
ETYMOLOGY. VERB SUM. 5&
SUM WITH PREDICATE NOUN.
RULE I.— Predicate Nouns.
362. A Predicate Noun1 denoting the same person
or thing as its subject agrees with it in CASE :
Ego sum nuntius,1 1 am a messenger. Liv. Servius rex cst declu-
ratus, Servius teas declared king. Liv.
MODEL FOR PARSING PREDICATE NOUNS.
Ego sum nuntius, I am a messenger.
Nuntius is A noun (31) of the Second Declension, as it has i
in the Genitive Singular (40) ; STEM, nunti. Singular ; nuntius,
nuntii, nuntio, nuntium, nuntie, nuntio. Plural ; nuntii, nuntiorum
nuntiis, nuntios, nuntii, nuntiis. It is of the Masculine Gender by
45; is in the Nominative Singular, and, as a Predicate Noun,
agrees in case with its subject ego, according to Rule I. : " A Predi-
cate Noun denoting the same person or thing as its Subject agrees
with it in CASE."
346. I. A DECLARATIVE SENTENCE has the form of an
assertion :
Miltiades accusatus cst, Miltiades was accused. Nep.
II. An INTERROGATVE SENTENCE has the form of u
question :
Quis non paupertateni extimescit, Who does not fear poverty1? Cic.
1. INTERROGATIVE WORDS. — Interrogative sentences generally
contain some interrogative word, — either an interrogative pronoun,
1 Every sentence consists of two distinct parts, expressed or implied :
1. The SUBJECT, or that of which it speaks.
2. The PREDICATE, or that which is said of the subject.
Thus, in the first example under the Rule, ego, I, is the subject, and
sum nuntius is the predicate. When the predicate thus consists of a noun
with the verb sum, or of a noun with a passive verb, the noun thus used
Is called a predicate noun. Accordingly, nuntius in the first example, and
rex in the second, arc predicate nouns.
60 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
^v.
adjective, or adverb, or one of the interrogative particles, ne, nonne^
num : t
1) Questions with ne ask for information : Scrlbitne, Is he writing ?
Ne is always thus appended to some other word.
2) Questions with nonne expect the answer yes : Nonne scrlbit,
Tg he not writing ?
8) Questions with num expect the answer no : Num scrlbit, Is he
writing ?
EXERCISE XIX.
t
, I. Vocabulary. t
Anciis, I, m. Ancus, Roman king.
Conditor, conditoris, m. founder.
Demosthenes, is, m. Demosthenes, Athenian orator.
Ebrietas, ebrietatis, f. drunkenness.
Graecus, a, iim, Greek, Grecian.
Graecus, I, m. Greek, a Greek.
Insania, ae,/. insanity, madness.
Inventor, inventoris, m. inventor.
Mater, matris, /. mother.
Mundus, I, m. world, universe.
Nonne, interrog. part. expects answer yes.
Num, interrog. part. expects answer no.
Philosophia, ae,/. philosophy.
Roma, ae,/. Rome.
Romaniis, a, um, Roman.
Romanus, I, m. Roman, a Roman.
Romulus, I, m. Romulus, the founder of Ronjau
Scipio, Scipionis, m. Scipio, Roman general.
II. Translate into English}*
1. Ancus2 fuit3 rex4. 2. Nonne5 Romulus rex fuerat?
3. Romulus rex fuerat. 4. Quis conditor Romae6 fuit?
5. Romulus conditor Romae fuit. 6. Ebrietas est insania.
TJ^Patria7 est parens omnium nostrum.6 f8. Graeci7 multa
rum artium8 inventores erant. 9. Demostnenes orator fuit.
* For Notes to the references on this page, see page 61.
ETYMOLOGY. VEIIB SUM. 61
10. Num. hie puer orator crit? 11. Ille puer orator sit.
1 12. Philosophia est mater artium. ^13. Cicero clarissimus9
oriitor fuit. 9 14. Cantus lusciniae jucundissimus9 est.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Who10 was the king?11 2. Was not 12 Romulus king?11
3. Romulus was king. 4. Who was the leader of the
Romans ?•% 5. Was not12 Scipio the leader of the Romans?
6. Scipio was the leader of the Romans. * 7. Your brother
is an orator.^t 8. This boy is my brother, f 9. These boys
will be diligent pupils. 10. These pupils will be diligent, i
. **~\
1 In preparing the longer and more difficult sentences in this and in
the subsequent exercises, it is recommended that the pupil should follow
the Suggestions which are inserted in this volume, page 143, and which
are intended to aid him in discerning the process by which he may most
readily and surely reach the meaning of a Latin sentence.
2 See Rule III. page 57.
3 See Rule XXXV. page 54. The verb sometimes precedes the Predi-
cate Noun, as in this sentence ; and sometimes follows it, as in several of
the following sentences.
4 Rex is a Predicate Noun, denoting the same person as its subject
Ancus, and is therefore in the Nominative, to agree with that subject in
case, according to Rule I. page 59.
5 See 346, II. 1 above.
6 Genitive, according to Rule XVI. page 22.
7 In this sentence, before turning to the Vocabulary for the meaning
of the words, notice carefully the endings of the several words in accord-
ance with Suggestion IV. What parts of speech do you find ? What
cases ? What mood, tense, number, and person ?
In accordance with Suggestion V., what order will you follow in look-
ing out the words in the Vocabulary ?
8 Artium depends upon inventores.
9 In accordance with Suggestion VII., for what forms will you look
in the Vocabulary to find the meaning of clarissimus and jucundissi-
mus (162) ?
>» See 188.
» See Rule I. >> QTf TSS
12 Nonm- See 346 IL '•
62
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
ACTIVE VOICE.
205. Amo, Hove.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind
Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
Supine.
am 5,
umare, timavi,
umatum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
/ love, am loving, do love.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
amd,
I love,
amainiks,
we love,
amas,
thou lovest,
amatis,
you love,
amat,
he loves ;
am ant,
they love.
IMPERFECT.
I loved, icas loving, did love.
umaba-m.
I was loving,
amfiljainii.*,
we were loving,
&m&tM&s.
thou wast loving,
amal^atis,
you were loving,
uniabkt.
he was loving ;
amabant,
they were loving.
1
FUTURE. ' v
/ shall or will love.
ama"b6,
I shall love,
umfibimiis,
we shall love,
uma"bis,
thou wilt love,
ama"bitis,
you will love,
ama1>it,
he will love ;
amalmnt,
they will love.
PERFECT.
I loved, have loved.
amavl,
I have loved,
amavimiis,
•we have loved,
amavistl,
thou hast loved,
amavistis,
you have loved,
iimavit,
he has loved;
amavenmt, er£, they have loved.
PLUPERFECT.
/ had loved.
umav^ram,
I had loved,
amav£i\amii.s,
•we had loved,
amave^-as,
thou hadst loved,
amav£r!atis,
you had loved,
amavei-at,
he had loved ;
amav^rimt,
they had loved.
i
FUTURE PERFECT!
I shall or will have loved.
amav£r6,
I shall have loved,
amav^rlmiks,
we shall have loved,
amav£ris,
thou wilt have loved,
amiiv£i*itis,
you will have lovedt
amav^rit,
he will have loved ;
amav^rint,
they will have loved.
ETYMOLOGY. FIRST CONJUGATION.
femes,
fimet,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
I may or can love.
SINGULAR.
/ may love,
thou mayst love,
he may love ;
ameuiiis,
ametis,
ament,
IMPERFECT.
/ might, could, ivould, or should love.
PLURAL.
we may love,
you may love,
they may love.
amarem,
amares,
amaret,
I might love,
thou mightst love,
he might love •
amaremiis, we might love,
ainaretis, you might love,
amareiit, they might love.
PERFECT.
/ may or can have loved.
amaverim, / may have loved, amaverlmiks, we may have loved,
amaveris, thou mayst have loved,
amaverlt, he may have loved ;
amaveritis, you may have loved,
amav£rint, they may have loved.
PLUPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should have loved.
amavissem, / might have loved,
amavisses, thou mightst have
loved,
amavisset, he might have loved ;
amavisseimiis, we might have
loved,
amavissetis, you might have loved,
amavissent, they might have loved.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. ama,
FUT. amato,
amatO,
love thou ;
thou shah love,
he shall love ;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. amare, to love.
PERF. amavisse, to have loved.
FUT. amatfiriks J ess£, to be
about to love.
G E E U N D.
Gen. amanill, of loving,
Dat. ftinfifiid.6, for loving,
Ace. arnancliim, loving,
All. umsiiiilo, by loving.
am ate, love yc.~
amatot£, ye shall love,
amantO, they shall love.
PARTICIPLE.
PRES. amans,2 loving.
FUT. aniaturii s,1 about to love.
SUPINE.
Ace,
Abl
fimatiim,
amatfi,
to lovet
to love, be loved.
1 Decline like bonus, 1,48.
4
2 Decline like prudens, 153.
64.
INTRODUCTORY LATIX BOOK.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
PASSIVE VOICE.
206. Amor, I am loved.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
Timor, amari, umfitiis sum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
I am loved.
SINGULAR.
amor
umatiir ;
amabar
amamliiX
umantiii*.
IMPERFECT.
/ was loved.
&mfigtftp|liil
umalmntiir.
FUTURE.
/ shall or will be loved.
itmatiks siim1
amattis £s
S.matfis est ;
timatiis
amatiis ^ras
amatiis ^rat ;
amatiis ero1
amatiis £rl*
amatiis
PERFECT.
/ have been or was loved.
amatl
rimiitl cstis
umiitl sunt.
PLUPERFECT.
I had been loved.
timatl eramiisi
umatl Gratis
iimjitl erant.
FUTURE PERFECT.
7 shall or will have been loved.
amatl erimiks
timatl iritis
fimatl
1 Fui, faisti, etc., arc sometimes used for sum, es, etc. ; thus amdtus
f'4 for amdtus sum. So faHram, futras, etc., for fram, ?ras, etc. ; also
fu&ro^ fulris, etc., for fro, tris, etc.
ETYMOLOGY. — FIRST CONJUGATION.
65
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
/ may or can be loved.
SINGULAR.
amer
ameris, or re
ametiir ;
PtURAL.
amemiir
ameminl
amentiir.
IMPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should be loved.
amarer amaremiii-
amareris, or re
amaretiir ;
amaremlnl
rimarciitiir.
PERFECT.
I may have been loved.
amatiis sim l amatl slmiis
amatiis sis amatl sitis
amatiis sit ; amatl slut.
PLUPERFECT.
/ might, could, icould, or should have been loved.
amatiis cssem1 amatl essemiis
amatiis esses
amatiis ess^t ;
amatl essetis
amatl essent.
( I M P E K A T I V Ej
PRES. amare, be thou loved; | amaminl, be ye loved.
FUT. amator, thou shalt be loved,
amator, he shall be loved;
INFINITIVE.
PRES amarl, to be loved.
PERF. amatiis csse, to have been
loved.
PUT. amatiiiaa Irl, to be about to
be loved.
amaiitor, they shall be loved.
PARTICIPLE.
PERF. amatiis, having been loved.
FUT. amancliis, t^o be loved.
1 Fugrim, fu&ris, etc., are sometimes used for sim, sis, etc. So also
ftiissem, fuisscs, etc., for cssem, esses, etc.
66 INTRODUCTORY LATIN 13OOK.
MODELS FOR PARSING REGULAR VERBS.
1. With Subject.
Yos laudavistis, You have praised.
Laudavistis is a transitive verb (192, 193) of the First Conjuga-
tion (201), from laudo ; STEM, laud. Principal Parts: laudo, lau-
ddre, lauddvi, laudatum. Inflection of Tense : lattdfivi, laudavisli,
laudavit, laudavimus, laudavistis, laudaverunt, or laudavere. The
form laudavistis is found in the Active voice, Indicative mood, Per-
fect tense, Second person, Plural number, and agrees with its sub-
ject vos, according to Rule XXXV. : " A Finite Yerb agrees with
its Subject in NUMBER and PERSON."
2. Without Subject.
Laudavistis, You have praised.
This is parsed like laudavistis, above, except that it agrees with
vos, implied in the ending istisj while laudavistis, above, agrees with
vos expressed.
FIRST CONJUGATION — ACTIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XX.
I. Vocabulary.
Yituper^ are, avi, atum, to llame.
Laudo, are, avi, atum, to 2^>raise.
II. Translate into English.
1. Amo, amabam, amabo.1 2. Amas, amabas, amabis.
3. Amat, amant.1 4. Amabat, amabarit. 5. Amabit, ama-
1 The pupil should carefully compare the forms grouped together
under the several numerals, and observe in what they are alike, and iu
what they arc unlike. Thus amo, amabain, amalx>, have the letters am
• ETYMOLOGY. — FIRST CONJUGATION. 67
bunt.1 G. Amamus, amabamus, amabimus. 7. Amavi,
amaveram, amavero. 8. Amavit, amaverat, amaverit. 9.
Amavi, amavimus. 10. Amaveram, amaveramus. 11. Amav-
ero, amaverimus. 12. Amem, amarem, amaverim, amavis-
sem. 13. Amemus, amaremus, amaverimus, amavissemus.
14. Amet, ainent. 15. Amaret, amarent. 16. Amaverit,
amaverint. 17. Amavisset, amavissent. 18. Ama, amato,
jimatote. 19. Amato, amanto.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. I praise, I was praising, I will praise. 2. He praises,
they praise. 3. He will praise, they will praise. 4. He
was praising, they were praising. 5. You were praising,
you will praise, you praise. 6. He has loved, he had lovec\
he will have loved. 7. I have praised, I had praised, I
shall have praised. 8. He may love, they may love. 9.
Let him praise, let them praise. 10. He would blame, they
would blame. 11. I should have praised, we should have
praised. 12. Praise thou, praise ye.
FIRST CONJUGATION — PASSIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXI.
I. Translate into English.
1. Amor, amabar, amabor. 2. Amaris, amabaris, amab-
eris. 3. Amatur, amantur. 4. Amabatur, amabantur.
(the stem, 203) in common; but they differ from each other in the end-
ings,— o, dbam, dbo. In the forms amat, amant, there is a still closer re-
semblance : not only is the stem am common to both, but the endings
have the letters at in common; or, in other words, the plural ending ant
differs from the singular ending at only in inserting n : AT, ANT.
1 Here the pupil will observe that the plural ending dbunt differs from
the singular ending obit, not only in inserting n before t} but also in
changing i into u : ABIT, ABUNT,
68 IXTEODUCTOKY LATIK BOOK.
5. Amabitur, amabuntur. 6. Amamur, amabamur, amabi-
intir. 7. Amatus1 sum, amatus eram, amatus ero. 8. Ama-
tus es, amatus eras, amatus eris. 9. Amatus est, amati1
sunt. 10. Amatus erat, amati crant. 11. Amatus erit,
amati erunt. 12. Amer, amarer, amatus sim, amatus essem.
13. Amemur, amaremur, amati simus, amati essOmus. 14.
Ametur, amentur. 15. Amaretur, amarentur. 16. Ama-
tus sit, amati sint. 17. Amatus esset, amati essent. 18.
Amator, amantor.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He is praised, they are praised. 2. He was praised,
they were praised. 3. He will be praised, they will be
praised. 4. I am blamed, I was blamed, I shall be blamed.
5. You are loved, you are praised. 6. You were loved,
you were praised. 7. You will be loved, you will be praised.
8. I have been blamed, you have been praised. 9. I had
been blamed, you had been praised. 10. I shall have been
blamed, you will have been praised. 11. You may be
blamed, you might be blamed. 12. He would have been
blamed, they would have been praised. 13. Let him be
praised, let them be "praised. 14. Be thou praised, be ye
praised.
1 The learner will observe, that, when the verb and the subject (ex-
pressed or implied) are in the Singular, the participle (amatus), which
forms one element of the verb, is also in the Singular ; and that, when
the verb and the subject are in the Plural, the participle (amati) is also
in the Plural.
The form of the participle also varies with the gender of the subject,
as well as with its number. Thus, if the subject is Masculine, the parti-
ciple will be amatus in the Singular, and amatl in the Plural ; if Femi-
nine, amdta in the Singular, and amdtac in the Plural ; and, if Neuter,
amdtum in the Singular, and amdta in the Plural. Thus the participle
in the compound tenses (i.e., in those which are made up of the participle
and the auxiliary sum) agrees with the subject in gender, number, and case,
like an adjective, according to Rule XXXV. 1, note.
ETYMOLOGY. FIRST CONJUGATION. 69
FIRST CONJUGATION — BOTH VOICES.
EXERCISE XXII.
I. Translate into English.
1. Lauclo, laudor.1 2. Laudabo, laudabor.2 3. Lauda-
bam, laudabar.2 4. Laudem, lander. 5. Laudarem, lauda-
rer.2 6. Laudat, laudatur.1 7. Amfibat, amabatur. 8.
Amabit, amabitur. 9. Amet, ametur. 10. Amaret, ama-
retur. 11. Laudarent, laudarentur. 12. Ament, amentur.
13. Laudant, laudantur. 14. Amabant, amabantur. 15.
Laudabunt, laudabuntur. 16. Amavit, amatus est. 17.
Laudaverat, laudatus erat. 18. Amaverit, amatus erit.
19. Lauda, laudare. 20. Amato, amator. 21. Laudanto,
laud an tor.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He blames, he is blamed. 2. I was praising, I was
praised. 3. You will praise, you will be praised. 4. He
1 In this Exercise, the pupil should carefully compare the correspond-
ing forms in the two Voices, — the Active and the Passive, — and ob-
serve the difference between them. The Passive laudor differs from the
Active laudo only in adding r ; the Passive laudabar differs from the Ac-
tive lauddbam only in taking r in place of m. Thus we find, that, in the
Indicative and in the Subjunctive, the first person of the Passive is formed
from the first person of the Active by simply adding r ; or, if the Active
ends in m, by substituting r for m. Again •- the Passive laudatur differs
from the Active laudat only in adding ur. Thus we find, that, in the
Indicative and in the Subjunctive, the third person of the Passive is formed
from the third person of the Active by simply adding ur,
2 Where must we look to find the meaning of these endings, — in the
Vocabulary, or in the Grammar ? and where to find the general meaning
of the verb ? See Suggestion II. To find the meaning of the verb to
which laudabor belongs, for what form must we look in the Vocabulary ?
Sec Suggestion VII.
70 INTRODUCTORY LATIX EOOK.
will blame, lie will be blamed. 5. They will praise, they
will be praised. C. We blame, we are blamed. 7. He has
praised, he has been praised. 8. They have blamed, they
have been blamed. 9. Pie had praised, he had been
praised. 10. They had blamed, they had been blamed.
11. He may praise, he may be praised. 12. He would
blame, he would be blamed. 13. They may praise, they
may be praised.
•NS.l .
FIRST CONJUGATION — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS,
DIRECT OBJECT.
RULE V. — Direct Object.
379. The Direct Object2 of an action is put in the
Accusative.
Deus mundum aedificavit, God made the ivorld.3 Cic. Libera
rein publicam, Free the republic. Cic. Populi Romani salutem de-
fendite, Defend the safety of the Roman people. Cic.
1 It is thought advisable that the pupil should now commence a review
of the grammatical forms which he has already learned. Accordingly,
this Exercise will involve nouns of the First and of the Second Declen-
sion. The pupil should therefore carefully review those Declensions
(42, 45). In connection with the subsequent Exercises, it is expected
that the other Declensions and the other Grammatical forms will be
reviewed in order, as will be indicated in the respective headings which
precede the several Exercises.
2 The Direct Object of an action is generally the object, person, or thing,
on which the action is directly exerted ; as, salutem, safety, in the third
example ; defend (what?) the safety. But the Direct Object is sometimes
the effect of the action, i.e. the object produced by it; as, mundum,
world, in the first example, — made the world.
3 In English, the object follows the verb ; thus, in this example, world
follows made ; but in Latin the object usually precedes the verb : thus
mundum precedes aedijlcduit. So also, in the third example, salutem
precedes defendtte; but sometimes the object follows the verb : thus in
the second exairple, rem puUicam follows libera.
ETYMOLOGY. FIRST CONJUGATION. /I
MODEL FOR PARSING DIRECT OBJECTS.
Deus mundum aedificavit, G-od made the world.
Mundum is a noun (31) of the Second Declension, as it has i in
the Genitive Singular % (40) ; STEM, mund. Singular: mundus,
mundi, mundo, mundum, munde, mundo. Plural : mundi, mundurwn,
mund is, mundos, mundi, mundis. It is of the Masculine gender, by
45 ; is in the Accusative Singular ; and is the Direct Object of the
transitive verb aedificavit, according to Rule V. : " The Direct Ob-
ject of an action is put in the Accusative."
EXERCISE XXIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Aedifico, are, avi, at urn, to build.
Aro, are, avi, atiim, to plough.
Canto, are, avi, atum, to sing.
Italia, ae, /. Italy.
Llbero, are, avi,' atum, to liberate.
Renovo, are, avi, atum, to renew.
. Spero, are, avi, atum, to hope.
Tarquinius, ii, m. Tarquinius, Roman king.
Themistocles, is, m. Themistocles, Athenian commander.
II. Translate into English.
1. Lusciniam laudo.1 2. Lusciniam laudamus. 3. Lus-
cinias laudat. 4. Luscinias laudant. 5. Luscinia lauda-
tur. 6. Lusciniae laudantur. * 7. Patriam amamus. 8. Pro
patria,3 pugnabimus. 9. Nonne3 Themistocles patriam lib-
cravit? 10. Patriam liberavit. ll.'J^taliam liberaverunt.
12. Italia liberiita4 est. 13. Tarquinius templum aedifica-
1 Lusciniam is the Direct Object of laudo, according to Rule V.
2 See Rule XXXII. page 24.
3 See 346, II. 1, page 59.
4 For agreement 'of participle with subject, see Rule XXXV. 460, 1,
page 54.
72 rtfTRODTTCTOKY LATIX BOOK.
vit. 14. Templum aedificubat. 15. Templa aedificave-
rant. 16. Templa aedificuta erant. 17. Templum aedifi-
critum erit. 18. Pueram laudabamus. 19. Pueri laudati
stint. -0. jSTonnc1 bellum renovatum cst?
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The nightingale is singing. 2. The nightingales are
singing. 1 3. The nightingales will sing. 4. The boys have
been praised. 5. Did you not1 praise the boys ?2 G. We
praised the boys. 7. The boys will be praised. \jl8. Have
we not1 liberated Italy? 9. You have liberated Italy.
10. We will liberate the country.* 11. We were ploughing
the field. f!2. Will you plough the field ?t 13. The field
will be ploughed.
CONJUGATION — THIRD DECLENSION.*
ADVERBS.
EULE LL— Use of Adverbs.
582. Adverbs4 qualify VERBS, ADJECTIVES, and other
ADVERBS :
Sapientcs ieliciter4 vivunt, The wise live happily. Cic. Facile4
doctissimus, unquestionably the most learned. Cic. Haud4 aliter,
not otherwise. Virg.
1 See 346, II. 1, page 59.
2 The Latin word for boys in this sentence will be in the Accusative,
according to Rule V., and will precede the verb.
3 The pupil should now review the Third Declension (48-54).
4 The Adverb is, therefore, the part of speech which is used to qualify
verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. Feliclter, happily, is an adverb
qualifying the verb vivunt, live (live liappily). Facile, easily, unquestion-
ably, is an adverb qualifying the adjective doctissimus, the most learned
(cosily, i.e. unquestionably the most learned) . Hand, not, is an adverb quali-
fying the adverb aliter, otherwise (not otherwise). The adverb in Latin
usually stands directly before the word which it qualifies, as in these
examples.
ETYMOLOGY. FIRST CONJUGATION. 73
MODEL FOIl PAESIXG ADVERBS.
Sapicntes fellciter vlvunt, The wise live happily.
Feliclter is an adverb, and qualifies vlvuni, according to Rule LI. :
4< Adverbs qualify VERBS, ADJECTIVES, and other ADVERBS."
EXERCISE XXIV.
i
I. Vocabulary.
Elo'quentiii, ae, /. eloquence.
Expugno, are, livl, atum, to takeffake by storm.
Fortiter, adv. bravely.
JuventuSjfjuvcntutis, y. youth. *
Orno, are, avi, atilm, to adorn, le an ornament tot
Pietas, pietatis, /. filial affection, piety, duty.
Pugno, are, avi, atum, to fight.
Serv5, are, avi, atum, to preserve, keep, save.
Void, are, avi, atum, to fly •
II. Translate into English.
1. Avis volat. 2. Aves volant. 3. Nonne1 avis cantfu
bat? 4. Aves cantabant. 5. Rex urbem2 aedificuvit.
6. Urbs aedificata3 est. 7. Urbes aedificatae3 erunt. 8.
Milites fortiter4 pugnaverunt. 9. Scipio5 milites laudavit.
10. Scipio5 militum virtutem laudabat. 11. Scipionem
laudamus. 12. Scipio patrem servavit. 13. Scipio urbem
cxpugnavit. 14. Urbs expugnata est. 15. Milites patriam
ainant. 16. Milites5 pro patria pugnabant. IT. Pietas
pueros ornat. 18. Yirtutes civitatem ornant.
1 Sec 346, II. 1, page 59.
3 Urbem, direct object of aedificdvit, according to Rule Y.
3 "Why aedifica'a in one case, and aedijicdtae in the other ? "Why not
acdificdtus in both ? Sec Rule XXXV. 460, 1, page 54.
4 Fortiter, an Adverb qualifying pugndveruntt according to Rule LI.
* In what order will you look out the words in this sentence ? Sea
Suggestion V.
74 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The birds are singing. 2. Do you not1 love birds?2
3. We love birds.2 4. This bird will tly. 5. Did you not1
save the city? 6. The soldiers saved the city. 7. Shep-
herds love the mountains. 8. We love virtue. 9. Is not
virtue loved? 10. It is loved. 11. Do not the citizens
praise the king? 12. They praise the king. 13. The king
will be praised. 14. The virtue of the king is praised.
FIRST CONJUGATION — FOURTH AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS.'
EXERCISE XXY.
I. Vocabulary.
Convoco, are, avl, atum, to assemble, call together.
Duplico, are, avl, atiim, to double, increase.
Dux, dticis, m. general, leader.
Fides, fidei, /. faith, fidelity, word,4 promise.
Fugo, are, avl, atiim, to rout.
Homo, hommis, m. man.
Senatus, us, m. senate.
Stimiilo, are, livi, atiim, to stimulate.
II. Translate into English.
1. Homines5 cantum lusciniae6 laudant. 2. Cantus lus-
ciriiae laudatur. 3. Romulus exercitum fusrat. 4. Nonne
1 See 346, II. 1, page 59.
2 Remember that the object in Latin usually precedes the verb.
3 The pupil should now review these Declensions (116, 119).
4 To keep one's word, fidem servdre : I keep my word, fidem meam servo,
or Jidem servo, as the Latin possessives, ?news, my, tuus, your, etc., when
not emphatic, are often omitted ; when expressed, they usually follow their
nouns.
5 In this sentence, what order will you follow, in accordance with
Suggestion Y., in looking out the words in the Vocabulary ? In accord-
ance with Suggestion VII., for what forms will you look in the Vocabu-
lary to find the meaning of homines (51, II.), milltcs (50, II.), stimulavit
(205)?
6 See Rule XVI. page 22.
ETYMOLOGY. FIRST CONJUGATION. 75
exercitum. fugavimus? 5. Exercitus fugatus est. 6. Ex-
crcitus fugatus erit. 7. Consul senatum. convocavit. 8.
Senatus convocatus est. 9. Senatus consulem laudavit.
10. Spes victoriae milites stimulavit. 11. Numerum
dieruni duplicavi. 12. Xumerus dieruni duplicatus est.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The boy has kept his word.1 2. Will you not keep
your word? 3. We will keep our word. 4. The consul
praised the fidelity of the citizens. 5. Will not the fidelity
of the citizens be praised ? 6. Will not the citizens praise
the fidelity of the army ? 7. They have praised the fidelity
of the army. 8. Did not the general praise the army?
9. He praised the army, 10. The army will be praised.
FIRST CONJUGATION — ADJECTIVES.2
EXERCISE XXYI.
I. Vocabulary.
Amplio, are, avi, atum, to enlarge.
Condemno, are, avi, atiim, to condemn.
Hannibal, Hannibalis, m. Hannibal, Carthaginian general.
Innocens, mnocentis, _ innocent.
Nobilis, e, noble.
Novus, a, iim, new.
Occupo, are, avi, atum, to occupy.
Pumciis, a, urn, Carthaginian, Punic.
1 Sec note 4, preceding page.
2 The pupil should now review Adjectives (146-162).
76 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. Translate into English.
1. Rex urbem novam1 ampliabat. 2. Urbem novam am-
pliabunt. 3. Hex urbem pulchram l ampliaverat. 4. Urbs
pulchra servata2 cst. 5. Hannibal multas civitates occu-
pavit. G. Juclices hominem innocentissimum 3 condemna-
vGrunt. 7. Num. Punicum bellum renovatum est? 8.
Nonnc Punicum bellum renovatum est ? 9. Punicum bel-
lum renovatum cst. 10. Roman! nobilissimas3 urbes ex-
pugnaverunt.
*r- III. Translate into Latin.
1. Will not the brave soldiers save the city? 2. The
brave soldiers will save the beautiful city. 3. The noble
city will be saved. 4. We praise good boys. 5. Good
boys will be praised. 6. Do you not praise diligent pupils ?
7. Diligent pupils are praised. 8. The citizens praise the
brave soldiers.
FIRST CONJUGATION — PKONOUNS.*
EXERCISE XXVII.
I. Vocabulary.
Aliquis, uliqua, illiquid or aliquod, some one, somebody.
Delecto, are, avl, atiim, to delight.
Dlligentia, ac, /. diligence.
Non, adv. not.
Saluto, are, avl, atiim, to salute.
Suus, a, iim, 7iis, her, its, their.
1 See Rule XXXIII. p. 32.
2 Why servata rather than servdtus ? See Rule XXXV. 460, 1, p. 54.
3 In accordance with Suggestion VII., for what form will you look lit-
the Vocabulary ? See 162.
4 The pupil should now review Pronouns (182J91).
ETYMOLOGY. — FIRST CONJUGATION. 77
II. Translate into English.
1. Quis bane1 urbem servabit? 2. Hanc urbem pul-
chram servabimus. 3. Quis te 2 salutav.it ? 4. Pater meus1
te salutat. 5. Haec1 vita te delectat. 6. Philosophia nos2
clelectat. 7. Omnia animalia se2amant. 8. Fratres tui1
laudantur. 9. Fratres mei laudati sunt. 10. Puer paren-
tes suos3 amat. 11. Pueri boni parentes suos3 amant. 12.
Parentes nostros amafrxus. v
\; **.
^ III. Transt&te into Latin.
1. Do you blame me? ^£. We do not4 blame you.
3. Whom do you blame ? 4. We blame your brother.
5. This book delights me. G. These books delighted us.
7. Did not5 your father praise you? 8. He praised us.
9. Did not5 some one praise your diligence ? 10. Our par- '
cnte praised our diligence. 11. Did your brother blame
you? 12. He did not4 blame me. 13. He blamed himself.
14. He will be blamed.
1 These Pronouns arc all used as adjectives, and agree with their
nouns like any other adjectives, according to Rule XXXIII. p. 32. Pro-
nouns thus used as adjectives generally precede their nouns; but the
Possessive Pronouns, meus, tuns, etc. (185), generally follow their nouns,
as in this Exercise.
2 Personal Pronouns, it will be remembered, are used as substantives
(184). They are accordingly governed like any other substantives. See
Rule V. p. 70. Observe that the object precedes the verb.
3.The pupil will observe that suos in the tenth sentence must be ren-
dered his, while in the eleventh it must be rendered their. Thus the
meaning of the Possessive suns depends in part upon the number of the
word to which it refers. It must be rendered his (her, its) when that
word, as puer in the tenth sentence, is in the Singular ; but it must be
rendered their when that word, as pueri in the eleventh sentence, is in the
Plural.
4 When a verb with a direct object has also an adverb qualifying it,
the usual order is Object, Adverb, Verb ; but the adverb non, not, may
stand either before or after the object.
5 Xonnc.
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Pres. Ind.
moned,
SINGULAR.
moneG
mones
SECOND CONJUGATION.
ACTIVE VOICE.
207. Moneo, I advise.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine.
monebani
monebas
monel>at ;
monel>6
monebis
mon€"bit ;
inoniil
monuistl
monuit ;
monuerani
munu^i-as
monuerat ;
munuero
monu^rls
monuerit;
monere, monui, monltiim.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
/ advise.
PLURAL.
monemiks
munetis
moncnt.
IMPERFECT.
/ was advising.
monetoamiis
monebatis
monebant.
FUTURE.
/ shall or will advise.
monel>imii.s
monel>itls
monebitnt.
PERFECT.
I advised or have advised.
munuiniuLS
munulstis
monuenint,
PLUPERFECT.
/ had advised.
munueramiis
monueratls
monu^rant.
FUTURE PERFECT.
/ shall or will have advised.
monu^rimiis
monu^rftis
monu&rint.
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONJUGATION.
79
SINGULAR.
monccliu
moneas
moneat ;
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
/ may or can advise.
PLURAL.
moiicaiii.iks
moneatls
raoneant.
IMPERFECT.
/ miglit, could, would, or should advise.
monerem
moneres
monuerim.
moneretls
monerent.
PERFECT.
/ may have advised.
mo nue rlin ii s
munu£rint.
PLUPERFECT.
/ migld, could, would, or should have advised.
mtmuissemus
monuisses momiissetis
monuiss£t ; montiissent.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. mone, advise thou ;
PUT. mon«3tO9 thou shall advise,
monetO, he shall advise;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. mon^re, to advise.
PERF. monuiss£, to have advised.
FCT. monttwriis ess^, to be
about to advise.
GERUND.
Gen. inonendl, of advising,
Dat. monenclO, for advising,
Ace. monencliiiia, advising,
Abl. munend65 by advising.
advise ye.
, ye shall advise,
monentO, they shall advise
PARTICIPLE.
PRES. monens, advising.
PUT. munitfiriis, about to advise.
SUPINE.
Ace. monitti.an, to advise,
Abl. monitft, to advise, be advised.
80
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
PASSIVE VOICE.
208. Moneor, I am advised.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
m5ne8r, moneri, monitus sum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
/ am advised.
PLURAL.
inonemiir
monemiiil
SINGULAR.
monedr
moneris, or re
monetiir ;
monentiiir.
mouebar
monel>aris, or r«S
monebatu.!' ;
IMPERFECT.
/ was advised.
monebamiir
monebaminl
munel>an.tti.r.
FUTURE.
/ shall or will be advised.
monebdr | monebimiir
inoneberis, or re monebimini
monebitilr ; monebiintiir.
PERFECT.
I have been or was advised.
monltils siim1 monitl siimiks
monitiis ^s monitl estis
monitiis est ; monitl sunt.
PLUPERFECT.
7 had been advised.
monitits eram1 monitl
monitiis eras monitl
momtiis erat ; monitl
FUTURE PERFECT.
7 shall or will have been advised.
monitiis ero1
monitiis erls
monittts
monitl erimiis
monitl erltls
monitl
1 Sec 206, foot-notes.
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONJUGATION.
81
SINGULAR.
monear
monearls, or i-e
moneatiii- ;
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
/ may or can be advised.
PLURJLL.
moneamiir
moneaminl
moneantiir.
IMPERFECT.
ight, could, would, or should be advised.
moneremiir
monei-eminl
monerentiii'.
monerer
monereris, or re
monere'tiir ;
PERFECT.
/ may have been advised.
mom tils slm1 monitl
monitiis sis monitl sltis
monitiis sit ; monitl sint.
PLUPERFECT.
/ might, could, would, or should have been advised.
monitiis essent1 monitl essemiig
monitiis esses monitl essetis
monitiis esset ; monitl essent.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. monere, be thou advised ; \ moneinin.1, be ye advised.
FUT. monetor, thoii shalt be ad-
vised.
monetor, he shall be ad-
vised;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. monerl, to be advised,
PERF. monitiis esse, to have been
advised,
FUT. monitiiiu. Irl, to be altout
to be advised.
monentor, they shall I* advised.
P A II T I C I P L K.
PERF. monittis, advised,
FUT. inunencltis, to be advisc/l.
1 See 206, foot-notes.
82 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
SECOND CONJUGATION — ACTIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Moneo, moncrc, monui, mom turn, to advise.
PareO, pfirere, parui, pEritum, to obey.
II. Translate into English.
1. Moneo, monCbam, monebo.1 2. Mones, inonetis. 3.
Monet, monent. 4. Monemus, monebamus, monebimus.
5. Monebant, monebunt. 6. Monui, monueram, monuero.
7. Monuimns, monueramus, monuerimus. 8. Monuit, mon-
uerunt. 9. Monuerat, monuerant. 10. Monuerit, monue-
rint. 11. Moneam, monorem, monuerim, monuissem. 12.
Moneat, moneant. 13. Moneret, monerent. 14. Monuerit,
monuerint. 15. Monuisset, monuissent.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. You advise, you were advising, you will advise.
2. He obeys, they obey. 3. He was obeying, they were
obeying. 4. He will advise, they will advise. 5. He has
obeyed, he had obeyed, he will have obeyed. 6. They have
advised, they had advised, they will have advised. 7. I
have advised, we have advised. 8. I had advised, I had
obeyed. 9. He may advise, he may obey.
1 The pupil should carefully compare the forms grouped together un-
der the several numerals, and observe wherein they differ from eaeh other
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONJUGATION. 83
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS — ACTIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXIX.
I. Vocabulary.
Canto, are, avi, atum, to sing.
Spcro, are, avi. atiim, to hope.
II. Translate into English.
1. Sperat, paret.1 2. Sperant, parent. 3. Speramus, pa-
rtjmus. 4. Sperabat, parebat. 5. Sperabant, parebant.
G. Sperabam, parebam. 7. Sperabarnus, parebamus. 8.
Sperabimus, parebimus. 9. Sperabo, parebo. 10. Speravi,
parui. 11. Speraveram, parueram. 12. Speravero, paruero.
13. Speravimus, parmmus. 14. Sperav6rat, paruerat. 15.
Speraverint, paruerint. 16. Sperate, parete.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. I sing, I advise. 2. I was singing, I was advising.
3. I will sing, I will advise. 4. He will hope, he will obey.
5. They will hope, they will o"bey. G. They w^ere singing,
they were advising. 7. They sing, they advise. 8. He has
hoped, he has obeyed. 9. They have hoped, they have
obeyed. 10. He had sung, he had obeyed. 11. They had
sung, they had obeyed. 12. We had hoped, we had ad-
vised. 13. We would sing, we would obey.
1 In this Exercise, the pupil should carefully compare the correspond-
ing forms in the two Conjugations, — the First and the Second, — and
should carefully observe the difference between them.
84 INTJIODUCTOKY LAT1X BOOK.
SECOND CONJUGATION-- ACTIVE VOICE.
OTHER PAIITS OF SPEECH.
ExKitcisis XXX.
I. Yoccibulary.
Aurum, I, n. yold.
Flos, floris, m. flower.
Habeo, habere, liubul, habit iim, to have, hold.
Mereo, merere, menu, meritiim, to deserve, merit.
Philosophus, I, m. philosopher.
Pondus, ponderis, n. weight, 7nass.
Praebeo, praebere, praebui, pracbitum, to furnish, give.
Praemium, il, n. reward.
Taceo, taccre, tacul, taciturn, to le silent.
Terreo, terrere, tcrrui, territum, to friohten, terrify.
II. Translate into English.
1. Pucr libruni liabet. 2. Pucri libros liabent. C. Libros
utiles1 habemus. 4. Librum utileni habuisti. 5. Nonnc
bonum1 amlcum habebis? G. Bonum amicuni habijbo. 7.
Bonos amicos habuimus. 8. Rex amlcos habebat. 9. Ilex
auruni habebat. 10. Hex2 magnum ami pondus3 habuerat.
11. Gloriam veram habcbitis. 12. Vcr praebet flores. 13.
Yer praebebit flores. 14. Philosophus tacebat. 15. Dis-
cipulus praemium meret.
1 Observe that the Latin adjective may either precede or follow iU
noun ; though it seems more frequently to follow, unless it is emphatic.
2 In this sentence, endeavor, in accordance with Suggestion IV., to
discover the subject, verb, and object, hefore looking out the words in the
Vocabulary. In what order will you look out the words in accordance
with Suggestion V. '?
3 When *a noun is qualified by both an adjective and a genitive, as
pondus by magnum and auri, the adjective usually precedes both nouns,
and is followed by the genitive, ass in this example: magnum auri pondus.
ETYMOLOGY SECOND CONJUGATION. 85
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Who lias my book? 2. I have your book. 3. Which
book have you? 4. I have three1 book's. 5. My brother
lias ten books. G. The king had a golden crown. 7. Did
he not have many friends? 8. He had many friends.
9. You will have true friends. 10. The pupils arc silent.2
11. Will you not be silent? 12. We will be silent.
SECOND CONJUGATION— PASSIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXXI.
I. Translate into English.
1. Moneor, monGbar, monebor. 2. Monemur, moncbri-
mur, monebimur. 3. Moneatur, moneantur. 4. Monerc-
tur, monerentur. 5. Monitus cst, moniti sunt. 6. Monitus
erat, moniti erant. 7. Monitus erit, moniti erunt. 8. Monc-
tor, monentor. 9. Monet, monctur. 10. Monent, monen-
tur. 11. Monebat, Monebatur. 12. Monebant, moneban-
tur. 13. Monebit, monebitur. 14. Monebunt, monebuntur.
15. Monemus, monemur. 16. Monebfimus, Monebamur.
17. Monebimus, monebimur.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He is advised, they are advised. 2. I was terrified,
we were terrified. 3. He will be advised, they will be ad-
vised. 4. You have been terrified, I have been terrified.
5. He had been advised, he had been terrified. 6. I shall
have been advised, I shall have been terrified. 7. I advise,
I am advised. 8. I was advising, I was advised. 9. I shall
advise, I shall be advised. 10. They terrify, they are ter-
rified. 11. They were terrifying, they were terrified. 12.
They will terrify, they will be terrified.
1 Place the Numeral before the noun.
2 Are silent is to be rendered by the Latin verb taceo.
1 «l V *2 * v fe* * * £j
86 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS — PASSIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXXII.
N
I. Vocabulary.
Admonco, admonere, admonm, admomtum, to admonish.
Amo, arc, avi, atiim, to love.
Invlto, are, avi, atiim, to invite.
Laudo, are, avi, atum, to praise.
Terreo, terrere, terrul, territum, to terrify.
Vitupero, are, avi, atum, to Name.
II. Translate into English.
1. Invitatur, terretur. 2. Invitantur, terrentur. 3. In-
vitamur, terremur. 4. Invitabamur, terrebamur. 5. In-
vitabatur, terrebatur. 6. Invitabantur, terrebantur. 7.
Invitabuntur, terrebuntur. 8. Invitabitur, terrebitur. 9. In-
vitabor, terrebor. 10. Invitatus sum, territus sum. 11.
Invitati sumus, territi sumus. 12. Invitatus est, territus
est. 13. Invitati sunt, territi sunt. 14. Invitati erant, ter-
riti erant. 15. Invitatus erat, territus erat.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. I am invited, I am admonished. 2. You are invited,
you are admonished. 3. He was praised, he was advised.
4. They were praised, they were advised. 5. You will be
invited, you will be admonished. 6. He has been blamed,
he has been terrified. 7. They had been loved, they had
been admonished. 8. They will have* been invited, they
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONJUGATION.
87
will have been admonished. 9. I may be invited, I may
be admonished. 10. I should be invited, I should be ad-
monished.
SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE VOICE.
OTHER PARTS OF SPEECH.
EXERCISE XXXIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Apud, prep, with ace.
Exerceo, exereere, exercul, exercitum,
Prater, fratris, m.
Miigister, miigistri, m,
M&noria, ae,/.
Puer, pueri, m.
Quis, quae, quid,1
Recte,. adv.
Tuus, a, iim,
near, before, among.
to exercise, train.
brother.
master, teacher.
memory.
boy.
who, which, what?
rightly.
your, yours.
II. Translate into English.
1. Quis monetur? 2. Xonne puer monetur? 3. Puer
recte monetur. 4. Pugri recte monentur. 5. Discipuli
recte moniti sunt. 6. DiscipQlus recte monitus est. 7.
Frater tuus recte admomtus erit. 8. Fratres tui recte ad-
moniti ei*unt. 9. Nonne admomti sumus? 10. Recte
admoniti sumus. 11. Memoria exercetur. 12. Memoria
1 For the declension of the Interrogative Pronoun quis, see 1 88.
o
88 IXTKODUCTOKY LATIN BOOK.
exerceatur.1 13. Memoria exercebitur. 14. Discipuli apud
niagistros exercentur.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Were not the boys terrified ? 2. They were terrified.
3. Let2 the pupils be admonished. 4. They have been ad-
monished. 5. Who will be advised ? 6. These boys will
be advised. 7. Has your memory been exercised ? 8. My
memory has been exercised. 9. Was not the general terri-
fied? 10. The general himself 3 was not terrified. 11. The
soldiers were terrified.
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS — MISCELLANEOUS
EXAMPLES.
EXERCISE XXXIY.
I. Vocabulary.
Camillas, I, m. Camillus, Roman general.
Exspeeto, are, avl, atum, to await, expect.
Hostis, is, m. and /. enemy.
Ingens, ingentis, huge, large, great.
Legio, legionis, /. legion, body of soldiers.
Non, adv. not.
Numerus, 1, m. number.
Opto, are, avl, atum, to wish for, desire.
Pecunia, ae,/. money.
1 Exerceatur; the Subjunctive is sometimes best rendered by let. See
196. I 2.
2 J^et be admonished is to be rendered into Latin by a single verb in the
Subjunctive. See 196, 1. 2.
3 Himself = ipsc. See 186,
ETYMOLOGY. SECOND CONJUGATION. 89
Philosophus, I, m. philosopher.
Praeceptor, pracccptoris, m. teacher.
Proelium, il, n. battle. ,
Romanus, I, m. Roman, a Roman.
Supero, are, avl, atum, to conquer.
Verecundia, ae, f. modesty.
II. Translate into English.
1. Camillas hostes superavit. 2. Hostes superati sunt.
3. Omnes discipiili paruerant.1 4. Roman! hostem exspecta-
bant. 5. Roman! 2 ingentem hostium numerum3 exspecta-
verant.1 G. Hostes proelium exspectabant. 7. Praeceptor
tacebat. 8. Discipuli tacebant. 9. Verecundia juventutem
ornat. 10. Philosophus pecuniam non habet; 11. Philos-
ophi pecuniam non optant.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Are you expecting me ? 2. We are expecting you.
3. Did you not await the enemy?4 4. We awaited the
enemy. 5. Have you not a good memory ? 6. I have a
good memory. 7. Will the soldiers obey ? 8. The brave
soldiers will obey. 9. Camillus had an army. 10. He
praised the army. 11. Did you advise the boy? 12. We
advised the boys. 13. Were not the enemy put to flight ?5
14. They were put to flight.
1 In accordance with Suggestion VII. 3, for what form will you look
in the Vocabulary ? See 205, 207.
2 Apply to this sentence Suggestions IV. and V.
3 Ingentem hostium numgrum, for arrangement see note on pondus, Exer-
cise XXX.
4 Put the Latin word in the plural.
5 Put to flight is to be rendered by a single Latin verb.
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
ACTIVE VOICE.
209, Kego, I rule.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
rego, regere, rexi,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Supine.
rectthu.
SINGULAR.
r£gel>am
rggebas
r£gam
reges
rexl
rexisti
rexlt §
rex^ras
rex£rat ;
PRESENT TENSE.
I rule.
rex^rfs
rex^rit ;
PLURAL.
regimiis
regltis
FUTURE.
/ shall or will rule.
IMPERFECT
/ was ruling.
regebamtts
regUJlmnt.
regemiis
regent.
PERFECT.
/ rw/ec/ or Aat'e ?*u/ec/.
ruxintuN
rcxistis
rexemnt, or
PLUPERFECT.
/ had ruled.
rex£ramiis
rex^rant.
FUTURE PERFECT.
7 shall or will have ruled.
rcx^rint.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD CONJUGATION.
91
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SINGULAR.
rggam
regas
PRESENT.
/ may or can rule.
PLURAL.
regain iis
regatis
IMPERFECT.
/ might, could, would, or should rule.
reg£retis
regerct ; regerent.
PERFECT.
/ may have ruled.
rex^rim. rexerfmiis
rex£rfs rexerltis
rex£rit ; rex£rint«
PLUPERFECT. •
I might, could, would, or should have ruled.
rcxiss£m rexissemiis
rexisses rexissetXs
rexissent*
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. reg^9 rulethou;
FUT. regitOj thou shall rule,
regitO, he shall rule ;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. reg£r£, to rule.
PERF. rexiss£9 to have ruled.
FUT. rectftrws ess^, to be about
to rule.
GERUND.
Gen. regendl,. of ruling,
Dat. rcgendd, for ruling,
Ace. regentliim, ruling,
All. regend.6, by ruliny.
rule ye.
ye shall rule,
r£gmit6, they shall rule.
PARTICIPLE.
PRES. rdgens, ruling.
FUT. rcctftriis, about to rule.
SUPINE.
Ace. rectiim, to rule,
Abl. rccttt, to rule, be ruled.
92 INTRODUCTORY LATIN COOK.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
PASSIVE VOICE.
210. Regor, I am ruled.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. perf. Ind.
regor, regi, rectus sum,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
I am ruled.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
rggdr regimiir
regeVas, cr r£ regimlnl
regatitr ; regitntitr.
regfcbar
reg«Bl>aris, or
r6gel>atikr ;
IMPERFECT.
/ ivas ruled.
regetoamlnl
r6getoantti.r.
FUTURE.
I shall or will be ruled.
rggar regemitr
rggeris, or rtS reg£mXnI
rSgetiir ; regentiir.
PERFECT.
/ have been or was ruled.
rectiis siim x rectl
rectiis es rectl
rectiis cst ; rcctl
PLUPERFECT.
/ had been ruled.
rectiis eram1 recti eranriis
rectiis eras rectl eralis
rectiis erat ; rectl
FUTURE PERFECT.
/ shall or will have been ruled.
rectiis er6 l
rectiis eris
rectiis
rectl erimiis
rectl erltas
rectl
1 See 206, foot-notes.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.*
PRESENT.
/ may or can be ruled.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
rggamiir
regaris, or re
rSgatiir ;
IMPERFECT.
/ might, could, would, or should be ruled.
rggerer
regereris, or re"
rgge"retiir ; regereiititr.
PERFECT.
/ may have been ruled.
rectits sim L rectl
rcctiis sis rcctl sltis
rectiis sit ; rectl sin* .
PLUPERFECT.
/ might, could, would, or should have been ruled.
rectits essem 1
rcctiis esses
rcctiis esset ;
rcctl cssemiks
rcctl ess^tlsf
rectl cssent.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. rogere", be thou ruled; \ regimiiil, be ye ruled.
FUT. regitdr, thou shalt be ruled,
rcgitor, he shall be ruled ;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. r€gl, to be ruled.
PERF. rcctiis esse, to have been
ruled.
FUT. rectiini Irl, to be about to
be ruled.
'9 ye shall be ruled.
PARTICIPLE.
PERF. rectiis, ruled.
FUT. regend.iis, to be ruled.
1 See 206, foot-notes.
04 rNTEODUCTOHY LATIN BOOK.
-THIRD CONJUGATION— ACTIVK VOICE.
EXERCISE XXXV,
I. Vocabulary.
Diico, ere, duxi, ductum, to lead.
Rego, ere, rcxi, rectum, to rule, govern.
II. Translate into English.
1. Rego, regebam, regain. 2. Regmius, regcbfimus, re-
genius. 3. Regitis, regis. 4. Regebas, regebatis. 5. Rege-
bant, regebat. 6. Reget, regent. 7. Rexerunt, rexit. 8.
Rexi, rexeram, rexero. 9. Reximus, rexeriimus, rexerimus.
10. Regas, regeres, rexeris, rexisses. 11. Regatis, regeretis,
rexeritis, rexissetis. 12. Regam, regrimus. 13. Regere-
mus, regerem. 14. Rexerit, rexerint. 15. Rexissent, rex-
isset. 16. Rege, regite.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. He leads, he was leading, he will lead. 2. He rules,
he was ruling, he will rule. 3. They lead, they rule. 4.
They were leading, they were ruling. 5. They will lead,
they will rule. 6. You have led, you have ruled. 7. He
had led, he had ruled. 8. They had led, they had ruled.
9. He will have led, he will have ruled. 10. They may
lead, they may rule. 11. He would lead, he would rule.
12. They would lead, they would rule. 13. AYe should
have led, we should have ruled.
ETYMOLOGY. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 95
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS — ACTIVE
VOICE.
EXERCISE XXXVI.
I. Vocabulary.
Dico, dicer e, dixi, dictum, to say, tell, ^eak.
Voco, are, uvi, atum, to call.
II. Translate into English.
1. Vocat, tacet, elicit.1 2. Vocant, tacent, dicunt. 3.
Vocabant, tacebant, dicebant. 4. Vocabo, tacebo, dicain.
5. Vocavimus, tacuimus, dixinius. G. Vocavi, tacui, dixi.
7. Vocaverunt, tacuerunt, dixerunt. 8. Vocaverat, tacue-
rat, dixerat. 9. Vocaverint, tacuerint, dixerint. 10. Vo-
ccm, taceam, dicam. 11. Vocarent, tacercnt, diccrent. 12.
VocFitc, tacete, dicitc.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. I invite, I admonish, I lead. 2. We call, we are silent,
we speak. 3. We were inviting, we were admonishing, we
were leading. 4. I shall call, I shall be silent, I shall speak.
5. He has invited, he has been silent, he has led. 6. He
had praised, he had obeyed, he had ruled. 7. They had
blamed, they had advise'd, they had spoken. 8. He may
call, he may admonish, he may rule.
1 In this Exercise, the pupil should carefully compare the correspond-
ing forms in the three Conjugations here represented, — the First, the
Second, and the Third, — and should carefully observe the difference be-
tween them. The advantages of such a course are twofold: first, it
teaches the pupil to distinguish the several Conjugations from each other,
which is one of the most important lessons to be learned in the study of the
language; and, secondly, it tends to form in him, thus early, the habit
of close and accurate observation, the habit of marking differences and of
tracing resemblances in kindred forms, which is of vital importance in
the whole course of classical study.
96 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
THIRD CONJUGATION— ACTIVE VOICE.
OTHER PARTS or SPEECH.
EXERCISE XXXVII.
I. Vocabulary.
Animus^ 1, m. mind, passion.
Benc, adv. well.
Defectio, defectionis, /. eclipse.
Disertc, adv. clearly, eloquently.
Educo, educere, eduxi, eductum, to lead forth.
Indlco, indicere, indixl, indicium, to declare.
Latme, adv. in Latin.
Praedlco, praedicere, praedixl, praedictum, to predict, foretell.
Sapienter, adv. wisely.
Thales, is, m. Tholes, a philosopher.
Tullus, I, m. Tullus, a Roman name.
Verum, I, n. truth.
II. Translate into English.
1. Bene dixisti. 2. Nonne Cicero in senatu dixerat?
3. Cicero cliserte dicebat. 4. Oratores diserte dicent. 5.
Philosophus sapienter dixit. 6. Philosopbi sapienter dixe-
rant. 7. Oratores Latin e dixerunt. 8. Caesar legiones
eduxit. 9. Hannibal exercitum in Italiam duxit. 10. Quis
bellum indixit? 11. Tullus bellum indixit. 12. Thales
defectionem solis praedixit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Wbo will speak the truth? 2. Have we not spoken
the truth? 3. You have spoken the truth. 4. Will not
the general lead fortb the army ? 5. He has led forth the
army. 6. Do you not govern your mind ? 7. We govern
our minds. 8. Did you predict this war ? 9. We did not
predict the war. 10. Who has declared war? 11. The
Romans have declared war.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD CONJUGATION. 97
THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XXXVIII.
I. Translate into English.
1. Regor, regebar, regar. 2. Regimur, regebamur, rege-
mur. 3. Regar, regamur. 4. Regeretur, regerentur. 5.
Rectus est, rectus erat, rectus erit. 6. Recti sunt, recti
erant, recti erunt. 7. Regit, regitur. 8. Regunt, reguntur.
9. Regebat, regebatur. 10. Regebant, regebantur. 11. Re-
get, regetur. 12. Regent, regentur. 13. Regimus, regi-
mur. 14. Regebamus, regebamur. 15. Regemus, regemur.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He is ruled, they are ruled. 2. I am ruled, I am led.
3. We are ruled, we are led. 4. He was ruled, they were
ruled. 5. He will be ruled, they will be ruled. 6. We
have been ruled, we have been led. 7. I lead, I am led.
8. We lead, we are led. 9. We were ruling, we were ruled.
10. He was leading, he was led. 11. They may rule, they
may be ruled.
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS -
PASSIVE YOICE.
EXERCISE XXXIX.
I. Translate into English.
1. Yocor, moneor, ducor. 2. Yocamur, monemur, du-
cimur. 3. Yocatur, monetur, ducitur. 4. Yocabatur,
monebatur, ducebatur. 5. Yocabantur, monebantur, duce-
bantur. 6. Vocabuntur, monebuntur, ducentur. 7. Voca-
98 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
tus es, m on it us es, ductus es. 8. Vocati estis, moniti estis.
ducti estis. 9. Vocatus eram, monitus eram, ductus cram.
10. Vocatus erit, monitus Grit, ductus erit.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He is invited, lie is admonished, he is led. 2. We
were called, we were advised, we were ruled. 3. He will
be called, he will be advised, he will be ruled. 4. He may
be invited, he may be admonished, he may be led. 5. He
has been called, he has been advised, he has been led. 6.
They have been called, they have been advised, they have
been led.
THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE VOICE.
OTHER PARTS OF SPEECH.
EXERCISE XL.
I. Vocabulary.
Mundiis, I, m. world.
Semper, adv. always, ever.
Verum, I, n. truth.
II. Translate into English.
1. Mundus regitur. 2. Omnis hie mundus semper rectus
est. 3. Hie mundus semper regetur. 4. Haec civitas bene
regitur. 5. Hae civitiites bene reguntur. 6. Civitates rec-
tae sunt. 7. Animus regatur. 8. Exercitus in Italiam
ductus est. 9. Multi exercitus in Italiam ducti erant. 10.
Bellum indictum1 erat. 11. Multa bella indicta1 sunt.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Was not the army led forth ? 2. The army was led
forth. 3. Has not this state been well governed? 4. This
1 Why indictum in one example, and indicta injhe other ? Why not
rather indictus in both ? See Rule XXXV. 1, page 54.
ETYMOLOGY. THIRD CONJUGATION. 99
state has been well governed. 5. Will not the truth be
spoken? 6. The truth has been spoken. 7. Let1 the truth
always be spoken. 8. Would not war have been declared ?
9. War would have been declared.
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS —
MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES.
EXERCISE XLI.
I. Vocabulary.
Gallus, I, ??i. Gallus i a proper name.
Hirundo, hirundinis, f. swallow.
Luna, ae, /. moon.
Nuntio, arc, fw, atum, to proclaim , announce'
Sensus, us, m. feeling, perception.
Supplicium, ii, ??. punisJiment.
II. Translate into English.
1. Hirundines adventum veris nuntiant. 2. Hirundines
adventum veris nuntiaverant. 3. Discipuli laudabuntur.
4. Gallus defectiones soils praedixit. 5. Defectiones lunae
praedixit. 6. Defectiones lunae praedicuntur. 7. Omne
animal sensus habet. 8. -Pueri tacebant.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. This boy has not observed the law. 2. Good citizens
will observe the laws. 3. Let the laws be observed. 4.
Who has your book ? 5. That boy has my book. 6. You
shall, have my book. 7. What did you say ? 8. I spoko
the truth. 9. The truth would have been spoken.
1 Let be spoken, render by the Latin Subjunctive. See 196, I. 2.
100
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Pres. Ind.
audio,
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
ACTIVE VOICE.
211. Audio, I hear.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
audire, audivi,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Supine.
auditum.
SINGULAR.
audio
audls
audit ;
audiebam.
audiebas
audiebat ;
audiam.
audies
audivi
audivisti
audivlt ;
audiverat ;
audiv£r6
audiv£rfs
audiv^rit ;
PRESENT TENSE.
7 hear.
IMPERFECT.
/ was hearing.
PLURAL.
a udi 111 ins
audltis
audiunt.
audiebamiis
audiebatis
audieba/nt.
FUTURE.
/ shall or will hear.
audiemiis
audietis
audient.
PERFECT.
I heard or have heard.
audivistis
audivemnt, or
PLUPERFECT.
/ had heard.
audiverfniiu.*
audiv^ratis
audiverant.
FUTURE PERFECT.
/ shall or will have "heard.
audiveriniiis
audiv^rint.
ETYMOLOGY. — FOURTH CONJUGATION.
101
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
I may or can hear.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
audiam
audias
audiat ;
audiamiis
audiatis
a ud ia lit.
IMPERFECT.
/ might, could, ivould, or should hear.
audlrem.
audlres
audiret ;
audiretis
audlrent.
PERFECT.
I may have heard.
audiverim audiverlmiis
audive'rls audiverftis
audive'rit ; audive'rint.
PLUPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should have heard.
audivissem audivisse'miis
audivisses audivissetis
audivisset ; audivissent.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. aiidi, hear thou ;
PUT. audit 6, thou shall hear,
audit 6, he shall hear ;
INFINITIVE.
PRES. audir£, to hear.
PERF. audivisse, to have heard.
PUT. auditttriis ess^, to be
about to hear.
GERUND.
Gen. audientll, of hearing.
Dat. audiendLo, for hearing.
Ace. audiendti.m, hearing.
AIL audientlO, by hearing.
hear ye.
audltote, ye shall hear,
audiunt69 they shall hear.
PARTICIPLE.
PRES. audieiis, hearing.
PUT. auditfiriis, about to hear.
SUPINE.
Ace. auditiiin, to hear.
Abl. auditft, to hear, be heard.
102
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
PASSIVE VOICE.
21 2. Audior, I am heard.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
Pres. Ind.
audior,
audiii, auditiis sum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
/ am heard.
SINGULAR.
audior
audlris, or re
audltiir ;
PLURAL.
audlmiir
audlm.in.1
audinntiir.
IMPERFECT.
/ was heard.
audiel>ar audiefoamiir
audiefoaris, or re audiebaminX
audiel>atiir ; audiebantiir.
FUTURE.
/ shall or will be heard.
audiar
audierls, or re
audietitr ;
audieiniir
audieminX
audientiir.
PERFECT.
/ have been heard.
audittis siim l
atiditiis &s
auditiis est ;
auditl
auditl estis
auditl
PLUPERFECT.
I had bem heard.
auditiis eram l
audittts eras
auditiis erat ;
auditl e'ramiis
auditl Gratis
auditl ersint.
FUTURE PERFECT.
/ shall or will have been heard.
auditiis ero l
auditiis ^ris
auditiis £rit 5
auditl
auditl e"rltls
auditl
See 206, foot-notes,
ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH COXJUG ATIOX.
103
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
7 may or can be heard.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
audiar audiamiir
audiarls, or re audiamliil
audiatiir ; audiantiir.
IMPERFECT.
I might, could, would, or should be heard.
audlr£r audlremiir
audlrerls, or re" audlremln.1
audlretiir ; audlrentiir.
PERFECT.
/ may have been heard.
auditii-S sim. 1
audlttts sis
a uditiis sit ;
auditl
auditl sitis
auditl sint.
PLUPERFECT.
/ might, could, would, or should have been heard.
auditiis cssem 1
auditiis esses
auditiks ess^t ;
auditl essemiks
auditl essetls
auditl essent.
IMPERATIVE.
PJEES. audlr^, be thou heard ; \ audimlni, be ye heard.
TUT. auditor, thou shalt be heard,
audltdr, he shall be heard ;
audiuntor, they shall be heard.
INFINITIVE.
PRES. audirl,
to be heard.
PERF. auditiis ess^S, to have been
heard.
FUT. auditiim. Irl, to be about
to be heard.
PARTICIPLE.
PERF. auditiis, heard.
FUT. audlend-iks, to be heard.
1 See 206, foot-no te$.
104 INTRODUCTORY LATIX BOOK.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XLIL
I. Vocabulary.
Custodio, Ire, ivi, Itiim, to guard.
Dormio, ire, Ivi, Itum, to sleep.
Eriidio, ire, ivi, iturn, to instruct, refine, educate.
II. Translate into English.
1. Audis, audiebas, audies. 2. Auditis, audiebatis, audi-
Gtis. 3. Audio, audlraus. 4. Audiebam, audiebamus. 5.
Audiam, audiemus. 6. Audivimus, audiveramus, audiveri-
mus. 7. Audivi, audiveram, audiverq. 8. Audlvit, audi-
verunt. 9. Audiam, audlrem, audiverim, audivissem. 10.
Audiamus, audiremus, audiverimus, audivissemus. 11. Au-
dlto, auditote.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. I hear, I guard. 2. We hear, we guard. 3. He was
hearing, they were sleeping. 4. He was sleeping, they
were hearing. 5. He will hear, they will hear. 6. We
have slept, you have heard. 7. I had heard, I had guarded.
8. He may hear, they may sleep. 9. They may hear, he
may sleep. 10. He might hear, they might sleep. 11. He
might sleep, they might hear.
FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGA-
TIONS.—ACTIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XLIIL
I. Translate into English.
1. Invitat, admonet, ducit, custodit. 2. Invitant, admo-
nent, ducunt, custodiunt. 3. Invitabant, admonebant, du-
ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 105
cebant, custodiebant. 4. Invitabat, admonebat, ducebat,
custodiebat. 5. Invitaveram, admonueram, duxeram, au-
diveram. 6. Invitaveramus, admonueramus, duxeramus,
audiveramus. 7. Invitaverim, admonuerim, duxerim, cus-
todiverim. 8. Invitaverunt, admonuerunt, duxerunt, audi-
verunt.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. We invite, we admonish, we lead, we instruct. 2. I
was inviting, I was admonishing, I was leading, I was in-
structing. 3. We were praising, we were obeying, we were
speaking, we were instructing. 4. He will blame, he will
advise, he will speak, he will instruct. 5. I have invited,
you have obeyed, he has led, they have guarded.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE.
OTHER PARTS OF SPEECH.
EXEKCISE XLIV.
I. Vocabulary.
Arete, adv. closely, soundly.
Munio, ire, Ivi, Itum, to fortify.
Sermo, sermonis, m. discourse, conversation.
Thrasybulus, I, m. ' Thrasybulus, Athenian general.
II. Translate into English.
1. Gives urbem custodiebant. 2. Urbem custodiemus.
3. Milites templum custodiunt. 4. Verum audltis. 5. Ye-
rum audlte. 6. Verum audiveramus. 7. Yerba tua audl-
mus. 8. Yerba mea audivlsti. 9. Orationem tuam audivi.
10. Sermonem audiebam. 11. Pueri arete dormiunt. 12.
Pueri cantum lusciniae au^liebant. 13. Thrasybulus urbem
munlvit.
106 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Do you not hear us ? 2. We hear. you. 3. Who
heard the oration? 4. We heard the oration. 5. The
pupils heard the conversation. 6. They did not hear your
oration. 7. The citizens are fortifying the city. 8. Who
Avill guard this beautiful city ? 9. The brave soldiers will
guard the city. 10. Will you guard the temple ? 11. We
will guard the temple.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE.
EXERCISE XLV.
I. Translate into English.
1. Audimur, audiebfimur, audiemur. 2. Audiutur, audi-
antur. 3. Audlrer, audiremur. 4. Audltus sum, audlti
sumus. 5. Audlti eramus, audltus eram. 6. Audltus erit,
audlti erunt. 7. Audit, auditur. 8. Audiunt, audiuntur.
9. Audiet, audietur. 10. Audlrem, au direr. 11. Audio-
bam, audiebar. 12. Audiebat, audiebatur. 13. Audlvit,
audltus est. 14. Audiverat, audltus erat.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. I am instructed, we are instructed. 2. He will be in-
structed, they will be instructed. 3. They have been
heard, they have been instructed. 4. They had been
heard, he had been instructed. 5. He was instructing, he
was instructed. 6. They are instructing, they are in-
structed. 7. We have heard, you have been heard. 8.
You have instructed, we have been instructed. 9. I have
heard, you have been heard.
ETYMOLOGY. — FOUKTil CONJUGATION. 107
FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGA-
TIONS.—PASSIVE VOICE. '
EXERCISE XLVI.
I. Translate into English.
1. Invitaris, admoneris, educeris, custodiris. 2. Invitan-
tur, admonentur, educuntur, custodiuntur. 3. Invitatur,
admonetur, educitur, custodltur. 4. Invitabitur, admoneb-
itur, educetur, custodietur. 5. Invitabatur, admonebatur,
cducebatur, custodiebatur. 6. Invitatus sum, admonitus
sum, eductus sum, custoditus sum. 7. Invitati erant, ad-
moniti erant, educti erant, custoditi erant. 8. Invitati
essemus, educti essemus. 9. Admonitus esses, custoditus
esses.
II. Translate into Latin.
1. He is called, he is terrified, he is led forth, he is
guarded. 2. They are called, they are terrified, they are
led forth, they are guarded. 3. They will be loved, they
will be advised, they will be led, they will be heard. 4. I
have been blamed, I have been admonished, you had been
ruled, you had been guarded. 5. You had been blamed, I
had been admonished. 6. You have been ruled, I have
been guarded.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE.
OTHER PAKTS or SPEECH.
EXERCISE XLVIL
I. Vocabulary.
Bellum, I, n. war.
Benigne, adv. kindly.
Civilis, e. civil.
108 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Egregie, adv. excellently.
Filius, ii, m. son.
Finio, ire, ivi, itum, to finish, bring to a close.
Legatio, legationis, f. embassy.
Vox, vocis, /. voice.
II. Translate into English.
1. Yox audlta1 est. 2. Voces audiuntur. 3. Cantuslus-
ciniae audltur. 4. Cantus lusciniarum audietur. 5. Urbs
mumta erat. 6. Urbes munientur. 7. Templum custodie-
tur. 8. Templa custodiuntur. 9. Legatio benigne audlta
est. 10. Haec legatio benigne audietur. 11. Yerba tua
benigne audientur. 12. Filii regis egregie crudiuntur.
13. Bellum civile finitum1 est.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Was not the orator heard? 2. The renowned orator
was kindly heard. 3. Let the city be fortified.2 4. Let the
temples be guarded. 5. The city has been fortified. 6. The
temples will be guarded. 7. Let the war be brought to a
close. 8. Let the boys be instructed. 9. Let the words of
the instructor be heard.
FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CONJUGA-
TIONS. — MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES.
EXERCISE XLVIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Atheniensis, is, m. and /. an Athenian.
Cams, canis, m. and f. dog.
C515, colere, colul, cultiim, to practise, cultivate.
Cum, prep, with abl. with.
1 Why audlta and finitum t instead of auditus and finltus ? See Hulc
XXXV. 1, p. 54.
2 Let be fortified is to be rendered into Latin by a single verb in the
Subjunctive. Sec 196, I. 2.
ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 109
Firmo, are, avi, atiim, to strengthen.
Grex, gregis, m. herd, flock.
Illustro, are, avi, atiim, to illumine.
Jungo, jungere, junxi, junctum, to join.
Labor, laboris, m. labor.
Modestia, ae, /. modesty.
Ovis, ovis, f. sheep.
Portus, us, m. port, harbor.
Prudentia, ae, /. prudence.
Terra, ae, /. earth.
Valetudo, valetudinis, /. health.
Varietas, varietatis, f. variety.
Violo, are, avi, atiim, violate.
II. Translate into English.
1. Sol terrain illustrat. 2. Modestia pueros ornat. 3.
Discipuli memoriam exercent. 4. Discipuli tui memoriani
exercebant. 5. Canes gregem custodiebant. 6. Greges
ovium custodiuntur. 7. Praecep tores juvehtutem erudient.
8. Labor valetudinem tuam firmabit. 9. Varietas nos de-
lectat. 10. Athenienses portum nmniverunt. 11. Philo-
sophia nos erudlvit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Good men love virtue. 2. Virtue will always1 be
loved. 3. Let virtue be always practised. 4. We will
always practise virtue. 5. The soldiers are violating the
laws of the state. 6. They will be punished. 7. Will
you instruct these boys ? 8. We will instruct good boys.
9. Who2 led this army into Italy? 10. Hannibal led the
army into Italy.
1 For the syntax of adverbs, and for their place in the Latin sentence,
sec Rule LI. and note 4, p. 72.
2 Which form of the Interrogative should be ..used, quts or qui? See
183.
110 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
VERBS IN IO OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
213. Verbs in io are generally of the fourth conjuga-
tion ; and even the few which are of the third are inflected
with the endings of the fourth wherever those endings
have two successive vowels, as follows :
ACTIVE VOICE.
214. Capio, I take.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine.
capio, capere, cepi, captum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT. TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
capiS, capis, capit ; | capimfis, capitis, capiunt.
IMPERFECT.
capiebam, -iebas, -iebat ; | capiebamus, -iebatis, -iebant.
FUTURE.
capiam, -ies, -i^t ; | capiemus, -ietis, -lent.
PERFECT.
cepi, -isti, -it ; | cepimiis, -istis, -erunt, or erS.
PLUPERFECT.
cepSram, -eras, -erat ; | ceperamus, -eratis, -erant.
FUTURE PERFECT.
cep6r5, -€r!s, -€rit ; | cepgrimus, -iritis, -erint.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
capiam, -ias, -iat ; | capiamiis, -iatis, -iant.
IMPERFECT.
cap^rem, -£res, -Sret ; | capgremtts, -Cretis, -erent.
PERFECT.
cepSrim, -eris, -Srft ; | cepSrimiis, -Critis, -£rint.
PLUPERFECT.
cepiss^m, -isses, -iss^t ; | cepissemtis7-issctls, -issent.
ETYMOLOGY. VER*BS IN IO. Ill
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
PRES. cape; | capitg.
PUT. capit5,
capitO;
capitote,
capiunt5.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
PRES. capgrg. PRES. capiens.
PERF. cepissS.
PUT. captures ess£. PUT. captures.
GERUND. SUPINE.
Gen. capiendi.
Dot. capiendo.
Ace. capiendiim.
Abl. capiendo.
Ace. captttm.
Abl. captu.
PASSIVE VOICE.
215. Capior, I am taken.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind.
capitfr, capi, captus sum.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
capior, capgris, capittir ; | capimtir, capimlni, capiuntttr.
IMPERFECT.
capiebar, -iebaris, -iebatttr ; | capiebamur, -iebamlni, -iebanttir.
FUTURE.
capiar, -ieris, -ietiir ; | capiemttr, -iemim, -ientur.
PERFECT.
capttts siim, es, est ; | capti stimus, estis, sunt.
PLUPERFECT. -
capttis eram, €ras, Srat ; | capti Sramiis, Gratis, €rant,
FUTURE PERFECT.
capttis gr5, grfs, Srtt ; | capti grimtts, Srltls, grunt.
6
112 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
S UBJUNCTI VE.
PRESENT.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
capiar, -iaris, -iatur ; | capiamtir, -iamini, -iantttr.
IMPERFECT.
cap£rer, -ereris, -Srettir ; [ capereraur, -firemim, -grenttir,
PERFECT.
capttis sim, sis, sit ; | capti simiis, sitls, sint.
PLUPERFECT.
captus esstfm, esses, essSt ; | capti essemus, essetis, essent
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. capCrC; capimim.
FUT. capitor,
capitor ; capiuntor.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
PRES. capi.
PERF. capttts essd.
FUT. capttim iri.
PERF. capttis.
FUT. capiendtts.1
EXERCISE XLIX.
I. Vocabulary.
A, ub, prep, with abl. from, by.
Accipio, accipere, accept, acceptiim, to receive.
Bellum, i, n. war.
Capio, capere, cepl, captum, to take, capture.
Carthago, Carthagmis, /. Cartilage, city in Africa.
Cornelius, ii, m. Cornelius, a proper name.
Gallus, I, m. Gaul, a Gaul*
1 The pupil will observe that the conjugation of Capio is somewhat
peculiar, combining certain characteristics of the fourth Conjugation with
others of the Third. He should now carefully compare it with the con-
jugation of Rego and with that of Audio, and note with accuracy both
the differences and the resemblances.
2 The Gauls were a people inhabiting the country of ancient Gaul,
embracing modern France.
ETYMOLOGY. — VERBS IN IO. 113
Jacio, jiicere, jeci, jactiim, to cast, throiv, liurl.
Lapis, lapidis, m. stone.
Lux, lucis, /. light.
Murus, 1, 7w. wall.
Publius, ii, m. Publius, a proper name.
Regulus, I, m. Regulus, Roman general
Teliim, I , n. javelin.
Troja, ae, /. Troy, city in Asia Minor,
II. Translate into JZnglish.
1. Graeci Trojara capiebant. 2. Trojam ceperunt. 3.
Troja capta1 est. 4. Troja cap t a erat. 5. Regulus ipse
captus est. 6. Belli duces capientnr. 7. Haec urbs capie-
tur. 8. Illam urbem capiemus. 9. Roma a Gallis2 capta
erat. 10. Galli Romam ceperant. 11. Scipio multas civita-
tes cepit. 12. Luna lucem a sole accipit. 13. Lucem a
sole accipimus. 14. Tuam3 epistolam accepi. 15. Milites
tela jaciebant.
• III. Translate into Latin.
1. We were taking the city. 2. The city will be taken.
3. The city has been taken. 4. The cities will be taken.
5. The cities have been taken. ' 6. Who * took Carthage ?
7. Publius Cornelius Scipio took Carthage. 8. Have you
not 5 received my letter ? 9. I have received your letter.
10. Have you not received five letters? 11. We have
received ten letters.
1 For the agreement of the participle in the compound tenses with the
subject, see Rule XXXV. 1, page 54.
2 See Rule XXXII., page 24.
3 What is the usual place of the Possessive Pronoun ? See page 77,
note 1. In this sentence, tuam precedes its noun because it is emphatic.
4 Which form of the Interrogative Pronoun should be used, qitis or
qui? See 188.
5 Which Interrogative Particle should be used ? See 346, II. 1,
page 59.
114 1NTKODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.
SYNTAX OF SENTENCES,
SECTION I.
CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES.
343. SYNTAX treats of the construction of sentences.
344. A sentence is thought expressed in language.
345. In their STKUCTUKE, sentences are either Simple,
Complex, or Compound:
I. A SIMPLE SENTENCE expresses but a single thought :
Deus mundum aedif icavit, God made the world. Cic.
II. A COMPLEX SENTENCE expresses two (or more)
thoughts, so related that one is dependent upon the other :
Donee eris felix, multos numerabis amicos; So long as you are
prosperous, you will number many friends. Ovid.
1. CLAUSES. — In this example, two simple sentences, (1) " You will
be prosperous," and (2) " You will number many friends/' are so united
that the first only specifies the time of the second : You will number many
fiiendsy (when ?) so long as you are prosperous. The parts thus united are
called Clauses or Members.
III. A COMPOUND SENTENCE expresses two or more in-
dependent thoughts :
Sol ruit, et montcs umbrantur, The sun descends, and the mountains
are shaded. Virg.
346. In their USE, sentences are either Declarative, In-
terrogative, Imperative, or Exclamatory.
SYNTAX. SENTENCES. 115
I. A DECLARATIVE SENTENCE lias the form of an asser-
tion :
Miltiades accusatus est, Miltiades was accused. Nep.
II. An INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE has the form of a
question :
Quis non paupertatem extimescit, Who does not fear poverty ? Cic.
1. INTERROGATIVE WORDS. — Interrogative sentences generally con-
tain some interrogative word, — either an interrogative pronoun, adjective,
or adverb, or one of the interrogative particles, ne, nonne, num :
1 ) Questions with ne ask for information : Scribitne, Is he writing ?
Ne is always thus appended to some other word.
2) Questions with nonne expect the answer yes: Nonne scrlbit, Is he
not writing ?
3) Questions with num expect the answer no : Num scrlbit , Is he writing ?
III. An IMPERATIVE SENTENCE has the form of a com-
mand, exhortation, or entreaty :
Justitiam cole, Cultivate justice. Cic.
IV. An EXCLAMATORY SENTENCE has the form of an ex-
clamation :
Reliquit quos viros, What Jieroes lie lias left ! Cic.
SECTION II.
SIMPLE SENTENCES.
ELEMENTS OF SENTENCES.
347. The simple sentence in its most simple form con-
sists of two distinct parts, expressed or implied :
1. The SUBJECT, or that of which it speaks.
2. The PREDICATE, or that which is said of the subject:
Cluilius moritur, Cluilius dies. Liv.
Here Cluilius is the subject, and moritur the predicate.
348. The simple sentence in its most expanded form
consists only of these same parts with their various modi-
fiers:
116 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
In his castris Cluilius, Albanus rex, muritur ; Cluilius, the Albait
king, dies in this camp. Liv.
Here Cluilius, Albanus rex, is the subject in its enlarged or modified
form, and in Jus castris moritur is the predicate in its enlarged or modified
form.
349. PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE. — The subject and
predicate, being essential to the structure of every sen-
tence, are called the Principal or Essential elements ; bnt
their modifiers, being subordinate to these, are called the
Subordinate elements.
350. SIMPLE AND COMPLEX. — The elements, whether
principal or subordinate, may be either simple or complex :
1. Simple, when not modified by other words.
2. Complex, when thus modified.1
SIMPLE SUBJECT.
351. The subject of a sentence must be a noun, or some
word or words used as a noun :
Rex2 decrevit, The Icing decreed. Nep. Ego2 ad te scrlbo, /
write to you. Cic.
SIMPLE PREDICATE.
353. The simple predicate must be either a verb or the
copula sum with a noun or adjective :
Miltiades est accusatus,3 Miltiades was accused. Nep. Tu es tes-
tis, You are a witness. Cic. Fortuna caeca est, Fortune is "blind. Cic.
1. Like Sum, several other verbs sometimes unite with a noun or
adjective to form the predicate. A noun or adjective thus used is
called a Predicate Noun or Predicate Adjective.*
1 Thus, in the example given above, the simple subject is Cluilius ;
the complex, Cluilius, Albanus rex; the simple predicate, morftur ; tho
complex, in his castris moritur.
2 In these examples, the noun rex and the pronoun ego, used as a noun,
arc the subjects.
3 In the first of these examples, the predicate is the verb, est accusatus;
in the second, the noun and copula, est testis ; and in the third, the adjec-
tive and copula, caeca est.
4 Thus testis, in the second example, is a Predicate Noun, and caeca, in
the third, is a Predicate Adjective.
SYNTAX. — NOUNS. 117
CHAPTER II.
SYNTAX OF NOUNS.
SECTION I.
AGREEMENT OF NOUNS.
UTTLE I. — Predicate Nouns.1
8680 A Predicate Noun2 denoting the same person
or thing as its Subject agrees with it in CASE :
Ego sum nuntius,2 / am a messenger. Liv. Servius rex cst dec-
laratus, Servius teas declared king. Liv.
EXERCISE L.
I. Vocabulary.
Amnis, amnis, m. river.
Creo, are, avl, atum, to create, make, elect.
Graecia, ae, /. Greece.
Imperator, imperatoris, m. commander.
Latinus, I, m. Latinus, Italian king.
Lavlnia, ae, /. Lavinia, a proper name-.
Maliim, I, n. evil.
Nomino, are, avl, atum, to call, name.
Numa, ae, m. Numa, Roman king.
Rhenus, I, m. the Rhine, river in Europe.
Servius, ii, m. Servius, Koman king.
Stultitia, ae, /. folly.
Turn, adv. then, at that time.
1 In illustrating in the subsequent pages the leading principles of the
Latin Syntax, we shall take up the most common Rules in the order in
which they stand in the Grammar. In doing so, we shall repeat in their
proper places those Rules which we have had occasion to anticipate in the
previous Exercises.
2 See 35?, 1 ; also Rule I. note, p. 59.
118 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. Translate into English.
1. Cicero consul l fu.it.2 2. Cicero orator fuit. 3. Cic-
ero turn3 erat2 orator clarissimus.4 4. Puer orator erit.
5. !N"uma erat rex. 6. Numa rex l creatus est. 7. Cato
imperator fuit. 8. Cato magnns imperator fuit. 9. Scipio
consul creatus est. 10. Scipio consul fuerat. 11. Stultitia
est malum. 12. Gloria est fructus virtutis. 13. Graecia
artium 5 mater nominatur.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. The Rhine is a large river. 2. Rome was a beautiful
city. 3. Cato was a wise man. 4. Your father is a wise
man. 5. Lavinia was the daughter of the king. 6. Lati-
nus was king. 7. Lavinia was the daughter of Latinus.
8. Tullia was the daughter of Servius.
APPOSITIVES.
RULE H — Appositives.
363. An Appositive6 agrees with its Subject in CASE :
Cluilius rex6 moritur, Cluilius the king dies. Liv. Urbes Carthago6
atque Numantia, the cities Carthage and Numantia. Cic.
1 Predicate Noun. See Rule I. For Model for parsing Predicate
Nouns, see p. 59.
2 For the place of the verb with Predicate Nouns, see note on fuit
under Exercise XIX.
3 Adverb qualifying erat. See Rule LI. p. 72.
* See 162 ; also Rule XXXIII. p. 32.
5 Artium depends upon mater. See Rule XVI. p. 22.
6 See 363, note, p. 15; also Model, p. 16. Rex, Carthdyo, and Nu-
mantia are all Predicate Nouns.
SYNTAX. — APPOSITIVES. 119
EXERCISE LI.
I. Vocabulary.
Alexander, Alexandri, m. Alexander, the Great.
Conjux, conjiigis, m. and f. wife, husband.
Epirus, I, f. EpiruSj country in Greece.
Eruditus, a, urn, learned, instructed in.
Hanno, Hannonis, m. Ilanno, Carthaginian general.
Justus, a, urn, just, upright.
Macedonia, ae, /. Macedonia, Macedon.
Nepos, nepotis, m. grandson.
Paulus, 1, m. Paulus, Roman consul.
Philippus, I, m. Philip, king of Macedon.
Pyrrhus, I, m. , Phyrrhus, king of Epirus.
Vulnero, are, avi, atuni, to wound.
II. Translate into English.
1. Cicero, eruditissimus homo,1 consul2 fuit. 2. Nuxna,
justissimus vir, erat rex. 3. Ancus, N"umae nepos,1 rex fait.
4. Hanno dux captus est.3 5. Pyrrhus, Epiri rex, vulnera-
ttis est. G. Philippus, rex Macedoniae, Athenienses supera-
vit. 7. Paulus consul1 regem superavit. 8. Philosophia,
mater bonarum artium, nos eriidit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Tullia, the daughter1 of Servius, was the wife3 of
Tarquin. 2. Servius, the father of Tullia, was a king. 3.
Scipio, the leader of the Romans, took Carthage. 4. Sci-
pio the general was praised. 5. Philip, king of Macedonia,
was the father of Alexander. 6. Alexander, the son of
Philip, was king of Macedonia.
1 Appositive. Sec Rule II. For Model for parsing Appositives, see
p. 16.
2 Predicate Noun. Sec Rule I.
3 Sec 214.
1IVBESITY
120 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
SECTION II.
NOMINATIVE.
364. CASES. — Nouns have different forms or eases to
mark the various relations in which they are used. These
cases, in accordance with their general force, may be ar-
ranged and characterized as follows :
I. Nominative, Case of the Subject.
II. Vocative, Case of Address.
III. Accusative, Case of Direct Object.
IV. Dative, Case of Indirect Object.
V. Genitive, Case of Adjective Relations.
VI. Ablative, Case of Adverbial Relations.1
EULE III — Subject Nominative.
367. The Subject of a Finite verb is put in the
Nominative :
Servius regnavit, Servius reigned. Liv. Patent portae, The gates
are open. Cic. Hex vicit, The king conquered. Liv.
1. The Subject is always a substantive, a pronoun, or some word
or clause used substantively :
Ego reges ejeci, / have banished kings. Cic.
2. SUBJECT OMITTED. — See 460, 2, p. 54.
EXERCISE LII.
I. Vocabulary.
Libertas, llbertatis, /.
liberty.
Opulentus, a, urn,
rich, opulent.
Quotldie, adv.
daily.
Vitiimi, ii, n.
fault, vice.
Oppidum, i, n.
towny city.
1 This arrangement is adopted in the discussion of the cases, because
vt is thought it will best present the force of the several cases, and their
relation to each other.
SYNTAX. VOCATIVE. 121
II. Translate into English.
1. Italia^ liberata2 est. 2. Urbs Roma liberata erat. 8.
Haec urbs clarissima liberabitur. 4. Haec urbs opulentissi-
ma est eapta. 5. Virtus quotidie laudatur. 6. Virtutes
semper laudabuntur. 7. Sapientia semper est laudata.
8. Libertas semper laudabitur. 9. Omnia hostiuru oppida
expugnata sunt.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Was not Philip wounded ? 2. Philip, king of Mace-
donia, was wounded. 3. Many soldiers were wounded.
4. Did not the soldiers fight bravely? 5. The soldiers
fought bravely. 6. Will not the laws be observed ? 7.
The laws have been observed. 8. They will be observed.
SECTION III.
VOCA TIVE.
RULE IV. — Case of Address.
369. The Name of the person or thing addressed is
put in the Vocative :
Perge, Laeli,3 Proceed, Laelius. Cic. Quid est, Catilina,5 Why
is it, Catiline ? Cic. Tuum est, Servi,3 regnum. The kingdom is
yours, Servius. Liv.
EXERCISE LIU.
I. Vocabulary.
Auditor, audltoris, m. hearer, auditor.
Carus, a, um, dear.
Juvenis, is, m. and /. a youth, young man.
Legatus, I, m, ambassador.
Saliito, are, avi, atwn, to salute.
1 Subject of liberata est. See Kule III. For Model for parsing Sub*
jects, see p. 57.
2 Why liberata rather than Uberdtus ? See Rule XXXV. 1, p. 54.
3 Laeliy Catilina, and Servi are all in the Vocative by thjs Rule. Ladi
is for Laelie ; and Servi, for Servie.
122 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. Translate into English.
1. Te, fScipio]- salutamus. 2. Vos, amid * carissimi,2
saluto. 3. Vos, audit ores omnes, salutamus. 4. Verba
mea, judices, audite. 5. Haec verba, legati, audite. 6.
Vos, milites, lianc urbem clarissimam custodlte. 7. Mili-
tes I fortissimi, patriam vestram liberate. 8. Vestram. vir-
tut em, j uven es, laudamus.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Boys^ hear the words of your father. 2. Judges,
you shall hear the truth. 3. Father, have we not spoken
the truth ? 4. You, boys, have spoken the truth. 5. Sol-
diers, you have fought bravely. 6. You, brave soldiers,
have saved your country. 7. Pupils, I praise your dili-
gence.
SECTION IV.
A CCUSATIVE.
RULE V.— Direct Object.
371. The Direct Object3 of an action is put in the
Accusative :
Deus mundum aedificavit, God made the icorld.* Cic. Libera
r«m publicam, Free the republic. Cic. Populi Komani salutem
dcfendite, Defend the safety of the Roman people. Cic.
1 In the Vocative, according to Rule IV. No special Model for parsing
is deemed necessary, as all nouns are parsed substantially in the same
way ; though different Rules arc, of course, assigned for different cases.
See Directions for Parsing, p. 15 ; also Model, p. 16.
The Vocative is not often the first word in the sentence, though it is
sometimes thus placed, as in the seventh sentence in this Exercise.
2 See 162.
8 See note on Direct Object, p. 70.
4 See note on the position of the Object in the Latin sentence, p. 70.
SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE. 123
EXERCISE LIY.
I. Vocabulary.
Flaminius, il, m. Flaminius, Roman general.
Marcelliis, I, m. Marcellus, Roman general.
Poeniis, Ji, urn, Carthaginian.
Poenus, I, m. a Carthaginian.
Sanctiis, a, iim, lioly, sacred.
Sicilia, ae, f. Sicily, the island of.
Spolio, are, avl, Htum, to rob, spoil, despoil.
SyrHcusae, arum, f. plur. Syracuse, city in Sicily.
II. Translate into English.
1. Alexander multas icrbes1 expugnavit. 2. Italia pul-
chras urbes habuit. 3. Hostes templa spoliabant. 4. Tem-
pla sanctissima spoliaverunt. 5. Hannibal Flaminium1
consulem 2 superavit. 6. Poeni Sicilian! occupaverant. 7.
Marcellus 3 magnam liujus insulae 4 partem cepit. 8. Mar-
cellus Syracusas,1 nobilissimam urbem,2 expugnavit.
III. Translate into I^atin.
1. Do you not5 love your parents f l 2. We love our
parents. 3. You practise virtue. 4. Our pupils will prac-
tise virtue. 5. Did not Rome have beautiful temples ? 6.
Rome had beautiful temples. 7. Have not the enemy 6
taken the city? 8. They have taken the beautiful city:
9. They will plunder all the temples.
1 Direct Object, in the Accusative, according to Rule Y. Tor Model
for parsing, see p. 71.
2 Appositive. See Rule II. 363.
3 Apply to this sentence Suggestions IV. and V.
4 Hujus insulae, of this island ; i.e., of Sicily. Observe the position of
the Genitive between the adjective magnam and its noun partem. See
note onpondus, Exercise XXX. II. 10.
5 See 346, II. 1.
6 The Latin word must be in the plural.
124 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
ACCUSATIVE OF TIME AND SPACE.
RULE VIII. — Accusative of Time and Space.
378. DURATION OF TIME, and EXTENT OF SPACE, are
expressed by the Accusative :
Romulus septem et trlginta regnavit annos,1 Romulus reigned
thirty-seven years. Liv. Quinque millia passuum ambulare, To walk
five miles. Cic. Pedes octoginta distare, To be eighty feet distant.
Cacs. Nix quattuor pedes 1 alta, Snow four feet deep. Liv.
EXERCISE LY.
I. Vocabulary.
Agger, aggeris, in. mound, rampart.
Ambulo, are, avi, Fttum, to walk.
Centum, hundred.
Gladiiis, ii, m. sword.
Lacedaemonius, ii, m. a Lacedaemonian, Spartctti.
Latiis, a, urn,' broad, wide.
Longiis, a, iim, long.
Mensis, mensis, m. month.
Nox, noctis, /. night.
Octoginta, eighty.
Pes, pedis, m. foot.
Quinquaginta, fifty •
Regno, are, avi, atiim, to reign.
Vigilo, are, avi, atum, to watch, be awake.
II. Translate into English.
1. Lacedaemonii pacem sex annos2 servaverunt. 2.
Magnam noctis partem2 vigilaveram. 3. Puer octo horas
1 Annos denotes Duration of Time, while millia and pedes denote Ex-
tent of Space. They are all in the Accusative by this Rule.
2 In the Accusative denoting Duration of Time. See Rule VIII.
No special Model for parsing is necessary. The pupil will be guided by
previous directions and Models.
SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE. 125
dormivit. 4. Latinus multos annos regnavit. 5. In Italia
sex menses fuimus. 6. In ilia urbe decem dies fuimus. 7.
Agger octoginta pedes l latus fuit. 8. Hie gladius sex
pedes longus est.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Did you not walk two hours? 2. We walked three
hours. 3. Did you not sleep six hours? 4. We slept
eight hours. 5. The soldiers guarded the city ten months.
6. Were you not in the city four months ? 7. We were
in the city five months. 8. The mound was fifty feet high.
ACCUSATIVE OF LIMIT.
RULE IX.— Accusative of Limit.
379. The Name of a Town used as the Limit of
motion is put in the Accusative :
Nuntius Romam redit, The messenger returns to Rome. Liv.
Plato Tarentum2 venit, Plato came to Tarentum. Cic. Fugit Tar-
qmmos,2 He fled to Tarquinii. Cic.
EXERCISE LVL
I. ' Vocabulary.
Athenae, arum, f. plur. Athens, capital of Attica.
Fugio, fugere, fugi, fugitum, to flee, fly, run away.
Lysander, Lys&ndrl, m. Lysander, Spartan general.
Miltiades, is, m. Miltiades, Athenian general.
Navigo, are, avi, atum, to sail, sail to.
1 In the Accusative, denoting Extent of Space.
2 Romam, Tarentum, and Tarquinios are all names of towns used as the
Limit of Motion ; i.e., the motion is represented as ending in those towns.
They are in the Accusative, according to Rule IX.
126 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Reduco, reducere, reduxi, reductum, to lead back.
Kevoco, are, avi, atum, to recall.
Sparta, ae, f. Sparta, capital of Laconia.
Tarentum, I, n. Tarentum, Italian town.
Thebanus, a, urn, Theban.
Thebaniis, I, m. a Theban.
II. Translate into English.
1. Cicero Romam l revocatus est. 2. Consules Romam
revocati sunt. 3. Hannibal Carthaginem l revocatus erat.
4. Lysander Athenas1 navigavit. 5. Pyrrhus Tarentum
fugatus est. 6. Consul regem Tarentum fugavit. 7. The-
bani exercitum Spartam ducunt. 8. Miltiades exercitum
Atlienas reduxit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Who fled to Carthage?2 2. Did not the enemy flee
to Carthage f 3. They fled to Carthage. 4. "Will not the
army be led back to Rome ?2 5. The army has been led
back to Rome. 6. The commander led the army to Athens.
SECTION V.
DATIVE.
382. The Dative is the Case of the Indirect Object,
and is used,
I. With Verbs.
II. With Adjectives.
III. With their Derivatives, — Adverbs and Substantives.
DATIVE WITH VERBS.
383. INDIRECT OBJECT. — A verb is often attended by
t» noun designating the object indirectly affected by the
1 In the Accusative, according to Rule IX.
2 The Latin word will be in the Accusative, in accordance with Rule
IX.
SYNTAX. — DATIVE. 127
action, — that TO or FOR which something is or is done.
A noun thus used is called an Indirect Object.,
EULE XII.— Dative with Verbs.
384. The INDIRECT OBJECT is put in the Dative :
I. With INTRANSITIVE and PASSIVE Verbs :
Tempori l cedit, He yields to the time. Cic. Sibi timuerant, They
had feared for themselves. Caes. Labori student, They devote them-
selves to labor. Caes. Nobis l vita data est, Life has been granted to
us. Cic. Numitori deditur, He is delivered to Numitor. Liv.
II. With TRANSITIVE Verbs, in connection with the
ACCUSATIVE :
Pons iter hostibus 2 dedit, The bridge gave a passage to the enemy.
Liv. Leges civitatibus suis seripserunt, They prepared laws for their
states. Cic.
EXERCISE LVII.
I. Vocabulary.
Carthaginiensis, e, Carthaginian.
Carthaginiensis, is, m. and f. a Carthaginian.
Conon, Conoms, m. Conon, Athenian gen'l.
Debeo, debere, debui, debitum, to owe.
Displiceo, displicere, displicui, displicitum, to displease.
Dono, are, avi, atum, to give.
Gens, gentis, f. race.
Gratia, ae, /. favor, gratitude, thanks.
Laboro, are, avi, atiim, to strive for.
1 TempSriy sibi, and labori are in the Dative with the Intransitive verbs
cedit, timuerant (intransitive here), and student; while nobis and Numitor I
are in the Dative with the Passive verbs data est and deditur.
2 Hostibus is in the Dative, in connection with the Accusative iter, with
the Transitive verb dedit. In the same way, civitatibus is in the Dative,
in connection with the Accusative leges, with the Transitive verb scripse-
runt.
128 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Monstro, arc, avi, utum, to show, point out.
Placet), placere, placui, pliicituin, to please.
Senectus, senectutis, /. old age.
Sententia, ae, /. opinion.
Servio, servire, servlvl, servltum, to serve.
Via, ae, /. way, road.
II. Translate into English.
1. Gives legibus * parent. 2. Multae Italiae civitates
Romania parebant. 3. Haec sententia Caesdri1 placuit.
4. Ilia sententia Caesari clisplicuit. 5. Milites gloriae
laborant. G. Hoc consilium Caesari nuntiatum est. 7.
Nostra consilia hostibus nuntiata sunt. 8. Tibi 2 magnam
gratiam habemus. 9. Habeo senectuti magnam gratiam.
10. Conon pecuniam civibus donavit. 11. Pastor puero
viam monstravit. 12. Tibi viam monstrabo. 13. Roman!
Carthaginiensibus bellum indixerunt.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Did I not obey my 3 father ? l 2. You obeyed your
father. 3. We will obey the laws of the state. 4. Do not
the citizens serve the king? 5. They have served the
king. 6. Will you not serve the state ? 7. We will servo
the state. 8. Will you not tell me (to me 4) the truth ? 5
9. I have told you (to you) the truth. 10. Will you show
1 Indirect Object, in the Dative, according to Rule XII. I.
2 Indirect Object, in the Dative, in connection with the Accusative
gratiam with the Transitive verb habemus, according to Eule XII. II.
.In the arrangement of Objects, the Indirect generally precedes tho
Direct, as in this sentence ; though the order is sometimes reversed, as in
the tenth sentence in this Exercise.
s In examples like this, the Possessive pronoun may either be ex-
pressed or omitted, as it is often omitted in Latin when not emphatic.
4 Dative. Sec Rule XII. II.
5 Accusative. Sec Rule XII. II.
SYNTAX. DATIVE. 129
me (to me) the way? 11. We will show you the way.
12. Did they declare war against the Romans? 13.
They had declared war against the Romans.
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
EULE XIV.— Dative.
391. With Adjectives, the OBJECT TO WHICH the qual-
ity is directed is put in the Dative :
Patriae solum omnibus1 carum est, The soil of their country is
dear to all. Cic. Id aptum est tempori, This is adapted to the time.
Cic. Omni aetati mors est communis, Death is common to every age.
Cic. Canis similis lupo est, A dog is similar to a wolf. Cic. Naturae
accommodatum, Adapted to nature. Cic. Graeciae utile, Useful to
Greece. !Nep.
1. ADJECTIVES WITH DATIVE. — The most common are
those signifying :
Agreeable, easy, friendly, like, near, necessary, suitable, subject,
useful, together with, others of a similar or opposite meaning, and
verbals in I ills.
EXEKCISE LVIII.
I. Vocabulary.
Amlcus, a, urn, friendly.
Hispania, ae, /. Spain.
Multitude, multitudinis, f. multitude.
Saguntum, I, n. Saguntum, city in Spain.
Similis, e, like.
Soliim, I, n. soil.
Veritas, veritatis, /. verity, truth.
1 Dative, showing to whom the soil is dear, — dear TO ALL. In the same
way in these examples, tcmptiri is used with aptum, aetdti with communis,
lupo with similis, naturae with accommodatum, and Graeciae with little.
130 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
II. Translate into English.
1. Parentes nobis l cari sunt. 2. Patria nobis cara est.
3. Patria tibi l erit carissima. 4. Patriae solum nobis caruni
est. 5. Hannibal exercitui carus fuit. 6. Yictoria Roma-
nis grata fuit. 7. Libertas multitudmi grata est. 8. Veri-
tas nobis gratissima est. 9. Jucunda mihi oratio fuit. 10.
Saguntum Romanis amicum fuit. 11. Hannibal Sagun-
tum,2 Hispaniae civitatem 3 Romanis 4 amicam,5 expugnavit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Will not these books be useful to you? 2. They are
useful to us. 3. They will be useful to you. 4. This law
has been useful to the state. 5. Will not this book be ac-
ceptable to you ? 6. That book will be acceptable to me.
7. This book will be most acceptable 6 to my brother.
SECTION VI.
GENITIVE.
393. The Genitive in its primary meaning denotes
source or cause ; but, in its general use, it corresponds to
the English Objective with o/1, and expresses various ad-
jective relations.
GENITIVE WITH NOUNS.
EULE XVI— Genitive.
395. Any Noun, not an Appositive, qualifying the
meaning of another noun, is put in the Genitive :
1 Dative, according to Rule XIV.
2 Accusative. See Rule V.
3 Appositive, in. agreement with Saguntum. See Rule II.
4 Dative with amlcam. See Rule XIV.
5 Amlcam agrees with civitdtem. See Rule XXXIII. p. 32.
6 See 162.
SYNTAX. GENITIVE. 131
CatCnis1 orationes, Cato*s orations. Cic. Castra hostium, The
camp of the enemy. Liv. Mors Hamilcaris, The death of Hamilcar.
Liv. Sec 363.
EXERCISE LIX.
I. Vocabulary.
Communis, e, common.
Conscientia, ae, /. consciousness.
Dulcis, e, sweet, pleasant.
Honor, honoris, m. honor.
Orbis, orbis, m. circle, world.
Orbis terrarum,2 the world.
Parviis, a, urn, small.
Principium, ii, n. beginning.
Rectum, I, n. rectitude, right.
Socrates, is, m. Socrates, Athenian philosopher.
II. Translate into English.
1. Justitia virtutum 3 reglna est. 2. Sapientia est mater
omnium bonarum artium. 3. Soci&tes'p&reiisphilosophiae
fuit. 4. Virtus veil honoris4 mater est. 5. Patria com-
munis5 est omnium nostrum6 parens. 6. Homa orbis7
terrarum caput fuit. 7. Omnium rerum principia parva
sunt. 8. Conscientia recti est praemium virtutis duleissi-
mum.
1 Catonis qualifies orationes, and is in the Genitive, in accordance with
the Rule.
2 Literally the circle of lands.
3 Genitive, depending upon reglna. Rule XVI.
4 Genitive, depending upon mater.
5 Communis agrees with parens. See Rule XXXIII. p. 32.
6 Genitive, depending upon parens.
1 Orbis depends upon eaput, and terrarum upon orbis.
132 INTRODUCTORY LATIN" BOOK.
III. Translate into T^atin.
1. Tho orations of Cicero arc praised. 2. The courage
of the soldiers saved the city. 3. The crown of the 'king
was golden. 4. The sword, of the general was beautiful.
5. The son of the consul violated the laws of the state.
G. The citizens will observe the laws of the state.
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
RULE XVII — Genitive.
399. Many Adjectives take a Genitive to complete
their meaning :
Avidus laudls,1 Desirous of praise. Cic. Otil ciipidus, Desirous of
leisure. Liv. Amans sui virtus, Virtue fond of itself. Cic. Eff iciens
voluptlitls, Productive of pleasure. Cic. Gloriae memor, Mindful of
glory. Liv.
1. FOKCE OF THIS GENITIVE. — The genitive here retains
its usual force, — of, in respect of, — and may be used after
adjectives which admit this relation.
2. ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. — The most com-
mon are
1) Verbals in ax, and participles in aiis and ens used
adjectively.
2) Adjectives denoting desire, knowledge, skill, recollec-
tion, participation, mastery, fulness, and their contraries.
EXERCISE LX.
I. Vocabulary.
Amans, amantis, loving, fond of.
Avidus, a, um, desirous of, eager for.
1 Laudis completes the meaning of avidus; desirous (of what?) of
praise. It is in the Genitive, by this Rule. In the same way, otii com-
pletes the meaning of cupidus • sui, of amans ; vohiptdtif, of efficient ; and
gloriae, of memor.
SYNTAX. A 1IL ATI VE . 1 33
Certumen, certiimmis, n. contest, strife, battle.
Ciipidus, a, urn, desirous of.
Fons, fontis, m. fountain.
Laus, laudis, f. praise.
Novitiis, no vi tat is, f. novelty.
Perltus, a, um, skilled in.
Piscis, piscis, m. fisli.
Plenus, a, um, full.
Voluptas, voluptatts, /. pleasure.
II. Translate into English.
1. Roman! avidi gloriae l fuerunt. 2. Homines novitatis
nvidi sunt. 3. ISTuma pads l erat amantissimus.2 4. Pa-
triae amantissimi sumus. 5. Consul gloriae cupidus erat.
G. Cicero gloriae cupidissimus 2 fuit. 7. Milites crant
avidissimi certaminis. 8. Fons piscium plenissimus est.
9. Atlienicnses belli navalis peritissimi fuerunt.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Boys are fond of praise. 2. Arc you not fond of
praise f 3. "We are fond of praise. 4. Were not the
Athenians fond of pleasure? 5. They were always fond
of pleasure. G. They are desirous of glory. 7. Are you
not desirous of a victory? 8. We arc desirous of a vic-
tory.
SECTION VII.
ABLATIVE.
412. The Ablative in its primary meaning is closely re-
lated to the Genitive ; but, in its general use, it corresponds
to the English Objective with from,, by, in^ with, and ex-
presses various adverbial relations. It is accordingly used
with Verbs and Adjectives ; while the Genitive, as the case
of adjective relations, is most common with ISTouns. See
393.
1 Genitive, completing the meaning of the adjective. See llule XVIL
2 See 162.
134 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, MANNER, MEANS.
RULE XXL — Cause, Manner, Means.
414. Cause, Manner, and Means1 are denoted by the
Ablative :
Ars utilitate laudatur, An art is praised because of its usefulness.
Cic. Gloria ducitur, He is led by glory. Cic. Duobus modis fit, It
is done in two ways. Cic. Sol omnia luce collustrat, The sun illu-
mines all things with its light. Cic. Apri dentibus se tutantur, Boars
defend themselves with their tusks. Cic. Aeger erat vulneribus, He
was ill in consequence of his wounds. Nep. Laetus sorte tua, Pleased
with your lot. Hor.
1. APPLICATION OF RULE. — This Ablative is of very
frequent occurrence, and is used both with verbs and ad-
jectives.
2. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE. — This designates that by
which, by reason of which, because of which, in accord-
ance with lohich, any thing is or is done.
3. ABLATIVE OF MANNER. — This Ablative is regularly
accompanied by some modifier, or by the preposition cum ;
but a few ablatives, chiefly those signifying manner, — more,
ordine, ration*, etc., — occur without such accompaniment :
Vi summa, With the greatest violence. Nep. More Persarum, In
the manner of the Persians. ~N"ep. Cum silentio audire, To hear in
silence. Liv. Id ordine f acere, To do it in order, or properly. Cic.
i It is not always possible to distinguish between Cause, Manner, and
Means. Sometimes the same Ablative may involve both Cause and
Means, or both Means and Manner. Still the pupil should be taught to
determine in each instance, as far as possible, what is the real force of
the Ablative. Thus in the examples, utilitate denotes cause, because
of its usefulness ; gloria, means, with perhaps the accessory notion of
cause ; modis, manner ; luce, means ; dentibus, means ; vulneribus, cause,
with perhaps the accessory notion of means ; aricl sorte, cause and means.
SYNTAX. ABLATIVE. 135
4. ABLATIVE OF MEANS. — This includes the Instru-
ment and all other Means employed.
5. ABLATIVE OF AGENT. — This designates the Person
by whom anything is done as a voluntary agent, and takes
the preposition a or ab:
Occisus est a Thebanis, He was slain by the Thelans.1 Nep.
EXERCISE LXI.
I. Vocabulary.
Muniis, muneris, n.* reward, gift.
Natura, ae, /. nature.
Pellis, pellis, / skin, hide.
Quotidianus, a, lim, daily.
Scythae, arum, m. plur. Scythians.
Triumpho, are, avi, atum, to triumph.
TJsus, us, m. use.
Yestio, ire, ivi, itiim, to clothe.
II. Translate into English.
1. Consul virtute 2 laudtitus est. 2. Urbs natura 3 mu-
nita erat. 3. Haec urbs arte munietur. 4. Muneribus*
delectamur. 5. Roma Camilli virtute est servata. 6. Ca-
millus hostes magno proelio superavit. 7. Scipio patrem
singular! virtute servavit. 8. Scipio ingenti gloria4 tri-
umphavit.5 9. Scythae corpora pellibus vestiebant,
1 By comparing this example with those under the Rule, the second
for instance, it will be seen that the Latin construction distinguishes the
person by whom any thing is done from the means by which it is done,
designating the former by the Ablative with a or ab (a Thebdms, by
the Thebans), and the latter by the Ablative without a preposition ; gloria,,
by glory.
2 Ablative of Cause, according to Ru.le XXI.
3 Ablative of Means.
4 Ablative of Manner,
5 The privilege of entering Rome in grand triumphal procession was
sometimes awarded to eminent Roman generals as they returned from
victory. Triumphavit here refers to such a triumph.
136 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Are not the fields adorned with flowers ? * - 2. The
fields are adorned with beautiful flowers. 3. Have you not
strengthened your memory l>y use ? 4. I have strengthened
my memory by daily use. 5. You will be praised for (be-
cause of) your diligence.2 6. Our pupils have been praised
for their diligence. 7. The general saved the city by his
valor. 8. Rome was saved by the valor of the Roman
soldiers.
i
ABLATIVES WITH COMPARATIVES.
RULE XXIII.— Ablative with Comparatives.
417. Comparatives without QUAM are followed by
the Ablative :
Nihil est amabilius virtute,3 Nothing is more lovely than virtue. Cic.
Quid est melius bonitate,3 What is letter than goodness ? Cic.
1. COMPARATIVES WITH QUAM* are followed by the Nom-
inative, or by the case of the corresponding noun before
them:
Hibernia minor quam Britannia existimatur, Hibernia is consid-
ered smaller than Britannia. Caes. Agris quam urbi5 terribilior,
More terrible to the country than to the city. Liv.
1 Ablative of Means. Rule XXI.
2 Ablative of Cause.
. 3 Virtute and bonitate are both in tlie Ablative, by this Rule ; the former
after the comparative amabilius, and the latter after the comparative me-
lius.
4 Quam is a conjunction, meaning than. Conjunctions are mere con-
nectives, used to connect words or clauses.
5 Agris and urbi, the one before and the other after quam, are both in
the same construction, in the Dative, depending upon terribilior according
to Rule XIV. 391 .
SYNTAX. ABLATIVE. 137
EXEKCISE LXII.
I. Vocabulary.
Argentiim, I. n. silver.
Avaritia ae./. avarice.
Bomtas, bomtatis, /. goodness, excellence.
Eloquens, eloquentis, eloquent.
Ferrum, I, n. iron.
Foedus, a, um, detestable.
Pretiosiis, a, iim, valuable.
Quam, conj. than.
Scientia, ae,/. knowledge.
Turris, turris,/. tower.
II. Translate into English.
1. Virtus mihi1 gloria2 est carior. 2. Patria mihi vita-
mea est carior. 8. Quid est jucundius amicitia? 4. Quid
foedius est avaritia ? 5. Aurum argento pretiosius est.
6. Animus corpore est nobilior. 7. Turris altior erat quam
murus.3 8. Quid multitudini x gratius quam libertas est ?
9. Pater tuns est sapientior quam tu.4 10. Quis eloquen-
tior fuit quam Demosthenes ?
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Silver is more valuable than iron? 2. Virtue is more
valuable than gold. 3. Wisdom is more valuable than
money. 4. Will not wisdom be more useful to you than
gold ? 5. Wisdom will be more useful to me than gokL
6. Goodness is more valuable than 5 knowledge. 7. Good-
1 See Rule XIV. 391.
2 Ablative, depending upon the comparative without quam, according
to Rule XXIII.
3 In the same case as turris, the corresponding noun before quam. It
is the subject of erat understood.
4 Subject of es understood.
5 In this and the following examples use quam, according to 417, 1.
138 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
ness is dearer to us than glory. 8. The Romans were
braver than the Gauls. 9. The soldiers were braver than
the general.
ABLATIVE OF PLACE.
420. This Ablative designates
I. The PLACE IN WHICH any thing is or is done :
II. The PLACE FROM WHICH any thing proceeds, in-
cluding Source and Separation,
RULE XXVI.— Ablative of Place.
421. I. The PLACE IN WHICH and the PLACE FROM
WHICH are generally denoted by the Ablative with a
Preposition. But
II. NAMES OF TOWNS drop the Preposition, and in
the Singular of the First and Second declensions desig-
nate the PLACE IN WHICH by the Genitive :
I. Hannibal in Italia1 fuit, Hannibal was in Italy. Nep. In nos-
tris castris, In our camps. Caes. In Appia via, On the Appian Way.
Cic. Ab urbe proficiscitur, He departs from the city. Caes. Ex
Africa, From Africa. Liv.
II. Athenis 2 fuit, He was at Athens. Cic. Baby lone mortuus est,
He died at Babylon. Cic. Fiigit Corintho, He fled from Corinth.
Cic. Romac 2 fuit, He was at Rome. Cic.
EXERCISE LXIII.
I. Vocabulary.
A, ab, prep, with all. from, ly.
Babylon, Babyloms,/. Babylon, the city of.
1 In Italia, in castris, and in via designate the PLACE IN WHICH ;
while ab urbe and ex Africa designate the PLACE FROM WHICH. They
are in the Ablative with a preposition.
2 Athenis, Babylone, and Corintho, being names of towns, omit the
preposition ; while Eomae, also the name of a town, is in the Genitive,
as it is in the Singular of the First deelensionT
SYNTAX. ABLATIVE. 139
Corlnthus, I,/. Corinth^ city in Greece.
Dionysij^, ii, m. Dionysius, tyrant of Syracuse.
Habito, are, avi, atum, to dwell, reside.
Hortus, I, m. garden.
Laetitia, ae,/. joy.
Luciis, I, 7?2. grove.
Regio, rugionis,/*. region, territory.
Senator, senatoris, in. senator.
Trlginta, thirty.
II. Translate into English.
'1. Hannibal in Hispania1 fuit. 2. Latlnus in Italia
regnavit. 3. Latlnus in illis regionibus regnabat. 4. Gives
ab urbe2 fugiebant. 5. Themistocles e Graecia fugit. 6.
Sex menses 3 Athenis 4 fui. 7. Alexander Babylbne erat.
8. Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis fugit. 9. Themistocles
Athenis fugit. 10. Athenis habitabat. 11. Romulus
JRomae 5 regnavit. 12. JRomae ingens laetitia fuit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Is not your father in Italy % 2. My father is in
Greece. 3. Were you not in Greece ? 4. We resided in
Greece three years. 5. Who is in the garden ? 6. My
brother is in the garden. 7. The pupils were walking in
the fields. 8. The nightingales are singing in the groves.
9. Your father resided many years at Athens. 10. Did he
not reside at Carthage ? 11. He resided four years at
Carthage. 12. Did you not receive my letter at Home ?
13. I received your letter at Corinth.
1 Ablative of PLACE IN WHICH, with the preposition in. See Rula
XXXII.
2 Ablative of PLACE FROM WHICH, with the preposition ab.
3 See Rule VIII.
4 In the Ablative, without a preposition, because it is the name of a
town.
5 In the Genitive, because it is the name of a toicn, and is in the Singu*
lar of the First declension.
140
INTRODUCTORY LATIN" BOOK.
ABLATIVE OF TIME. ^
ETJLE XXVin,— Time.
426. The TIME of an Action is denoted by th& Ab*
lative :
Oetogesimo anno1 est mortuus, He died in his eightieth year. Cic.
Vere convenere, They assembled in the spring. Liv. Natali die suo,
On his birth-day. Nep. Hicme et aestate, In winter and summer. Cic.
1. DESIGNATIONS OF TIME. — Any word so used as to involve
the time of an action or event may be put in the ablative : hello,
in the time of war ; pugna, in the time of battle ; ludis, at the time
of the games ; memoria, in memory, i.e., in the time of one's recuF-
lection.
EXERCISE LXIV.
I. Vocabulary.
Brutus, I, m.
Deflagro, are, avi, atiim,
Diana, ae,/.
Ephesius, a, iim,
Hiems, hiemis,/.
Natalis, e;
Natalis dies,
Pompeiiis, ii, m.
Persae, arum, m. plur.
Scribo, scrlbere, scrips!, scrlptum,
Tempus, temporis, n.
Brutus , a Roman patriot.
to burn, be consumed.
Diana, a goddess.
Ephesian, of Ephesus.
winter.
belonging to one's birth, natal.
birth-day.
Pompey, Roman general.
Persians.
to write.
time.
II. Translate into English.
1. Natiili die2 tuo scripsisti epistolam. 2. Eodem die
epistolam tuam accepi.3 3. Pompeius urbem tertio mense
1 Anno, vere, die, hieme, and aestate are all in the Ablative, hy this Rule.
2 Ablative of Time, according to Rule XXVIII.
3 From accipio.
SYNTAX. ABLATIVE. 141
cepit. 4. Eodem die Persae superati sunt. 5. Pompeius
illo tempore miles fuit. 6. Illo anno Dianae Ephesiae tern-
plum deilagravit. 7. Occasu soils hostes fugati sunt. 8.
Illo die Brutus patriam servavit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Were you not in Athens1 at that time? 2. We were
at Corinth2 at that time. 3. Do you not reside in the city 1
in winter ? 4. We reside in this beautiful city in the win-
ter. 5. The city was taken at sunset. 6. Were you not
in the city at that hour ? 7. I was in the city at that time.
8. Were you not in Rome 2 on your birth-day ? 9. I was
in that city on my birth-day.
SECTION VIII.
CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS.
RULE XXXII — Cases with Prepositions.
432. The Accusative and Ablative may be used
with Prepositions :
Ad amlcum3 scrips!, / have written to a friend. Cic. In curiam,
Into the senate-house. Liv. In Italia, In Italy. Nep. Pro castris,
Before the camp.
433. The ACCUSATIVE is used with
Ad, adversus (adversum), ante, apud, circa, circum, circiter, cis,
citra, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per,
pone, post, praeter, prope, propter, secundum, supra, trans, ultra,
Versus :
Adurbem, To the city. Cic. Adversus deos, Toward the gods. Cic.
434. The ABLATIVE is used with
A or ab (abs), absque, coram, cum, de,
e or ex, prae, pro, sine, tenus :
1 Ablative of Place. See Kulc XXVI.
2 Genitive of Place. See Kule XXVI. II.
3 The Accusative amlcum is here used with the preposition ad; curiam,
with in; the Ablative Italia, with in. See 435, 1.
142 rNTKODUCTOKY LATLtf BOOK.
Ab urbe, From the city. Caes. Coram conventu, In tJte presence
of the assembly. Nep.
435. The ACCUSATIVE or ABLATIVE is used with
In, sub, subter, super:
In Asiam profugit, He Jled into Asia. Cic. Hannibal in Italia
fuit, Hannibal was in Italy. Nep.
1. In and Sub take the Accusative in answer to the question
whither, the Ablative in answer to where: In Asiam, (whither?)
into Asia ; In Italia, (where ?) in Italy.
EXERCISE LXV.
I. Vocabulary.
Adversus, prep, with ace. against.
DlnucS, are, avl, atum, to fight.
Per, prep, with ace. of, through.
Prosperc, adv. successfully.
Provoco, are, Fivl, atum, to challenge.
II. Translate into English.
1. Lacedaemonii hostes ad proeliwn provocabant. 2.
Scipio contra Hannonem, ducem Carthaginiensium, pros-
pere pugnat. 3. Caesar adversus Pompeium dimicavit.
4. Yeritas per se l mihi grata est. 5. Virtus per se laudab-
ilis est. 6. Persae a Graecis 2 superati sunt. 7. Cicero
de amicitid scripsit.
III. Translate into Latin.
1. Will not the army be led back to the city? 2. It has
been led back to the city. 3. Will you not write to me ?
4. I will write to you. 5. Friendship is valuable of itself.
6. Have you not received five letters from me f 7. I have
received four letters from you. 8. I have received two
letters from your brother.
1 Per se, literally through itself: render in itself or of itself.
2 A Graecis, by the Greeks. See 414, 5.~
SUGGESTIONS TO THE LEARNER,
I. THE preparation of a Heading Lesson in Latin in-
volves,
1. A knowledge of the Meaning of tlio Latin.
2. A knowledge of the Structure of the Latin Sentences.
3. A translation into English.
MEAXIXG OF THE LATIN.
II. Remember that almost every inflected word in a
Latin sentence requires the use of both the Dictionary and
the Grammar to ascertain its meaning.
The Dictionary gives the meaning of the word, without reference to its
Grammatical properties of case, number, mood, tense, etc. ; and the Gram-
mar, the meaning of the endings which mark these properties. Tho
Dictionary will give the meaning of mensa, a table, but not of mensarum,
of tables : the Grammar alone will give the force of the ending arum.
III. Make yourself so familiar with all the endings of
inflection, with their exact form and force, whether in
declension or conjugation, that you will not only readily
distinguish the different parts of speech from each other,
but also the different forms of the same word, with their
exact and distinctive force.
TV. In taking up a Latin sentence,
1. Notice carefully the endings of the several words, and
thus determine which words are nouns, which verbs, etc.
2. Observe the force of each ending, and thus determine
case, number, voice, mood, tense, etc.
This will be found to be a very important step toward the mastery of
the sentence. By this means, you will discover not only the relation of
the words to each other, but also an important part of their meaning,
• — that which they derive from their endings.
143
>A OF THIS ^
144 INTEODUCTOKY LATl^T BOOK.
V. The key to the meaning of any simple sentence (345,
I.) will be found in the simple subject and predicate ; i.e.,
in the Nominative and its Verb. Hence, in looking out
the sentence, observe the following order. Take
1. The Subject, or Nominative.
The ending will, in most instances, enable you to distinguish this from
all other words, except the adjectives winch agree with it. These may be
looked out at the same time with the subject.
Sometimes the subject is not expressed, but only implied, in the
ending of the verb. It may then be readily supplied, as it is always a
pronoun of such person and number as the verb indicates : as, audio, I
hear, the ending io showing that the subject is ego ; auditis, you hear, the
ending itis showing that the subject is vos.
2. The Verb, with Predicate Noun or Adjective, if any.
This will be readily known by the ending. Now, combining this with
the Subject, you will have an outline of the sentence. All the other
words must now be associated with these two parts.
- 3. The Modifiers of the Subject; i.e., adjectives agreeing
with it, nominatives in apposition with it, genitives de-
pendent upon it, etc.
But perhaps some of these have already been looked out in the attempt
to ascertain the subject.
In looking out these words, bear in mind the meaning of the subject
to which they belong. This Avill greatly aid you in selecting from the
dictionary the true meaning in the passage before you,
4. The Modifiers of the Verb, i.e. (1) Oblique cases,
accusatives, datives, etc., dependent upon it, and (2) Ad-
verbs qualifying it.
Bear in mind all the while the force of the case and the meaning of the
verb, that you may be able to select for each word the true meaning in
the passage before you.
VI. In complex and compound sentences (345, II., III.),
discover first the connectives which unite the several mem-
bers, and then proceed with each member as with a simple
sentence.
SUGGESTIONS TO THE LEARNER. 145
VII. In the use of Dictionary and Vocabulary, remem-
ber that you are not to look for the particular form which
occurs in the sentence, but for the Nona. Sing, of nouns,
adjectives, and pronouns, and for the First Pers. Sing.
Pres. Indie. Act. of verbs. Therefore,
1. In Pronouns, make yourself so familiar with their
declension, that any oblique case will at once suggest the
Nom. Sing.
If vobis occurs, yon must remember that the Nom. Sing, is tu.
2. In Nouns and Adjectives, make yourself so familiar
with the case-endings, that you will be able to drop that of
the given case, and substitute for it that of the Nom. Sing.
Thus menstZws; stem mens, Nom. Sing, mensis, which you will find
in the Vocabulary. So urbm/wr&, urbs.
3. In Verbs, change the ending of the given form into
that of the First Pers. Sing, of the Pres. Indie. Act.
Thus arndbat; stem am, First Pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. Act. amo, which
you will find in the Vocabulary. So amswerunt ; First Pers. Pcrf. amdvi,
Perf. stem amav, Verb stem am ; amo.
To illustrate the steps recommended in the preceding suggestions, we
add the following
Model.
VIII. Themistocles imperator servitute totam Graeciam
liberavit.
1. Without knowing the meaning of the words, you will discover
from their forms,
1) That Themistocles and imperator are probably nouns in the
Nom. Sing.
2) That servitute is a noun in the Abl. Sing.
3) That totam and Graeciam are either nouns or adjectives in the
Accus. Sing.
4) That liberavit is a verb in the Act. voice, Indie, mood, Perf.
tense, Third Person, Singular number.
2. Now, turning to the Vocabulary for the meaning of the words,
you will learn,
146 INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
1) That Themistocles is the name of an eminent Athenian gen-
eral : THEMISTOCLES.
2) That liberOj for which you must look, not for Ubcravit, meani
to liberate : LIBERATED.
Themistocles liberated.
3) That imperator means commander : THE COMMANDER.
Themistocles the commander liberated.
4) That Graeciam is the name of a country : GREECE.
Themistocles the commander liberated Greece.
5) That totus means tlie whole, all : ALL.
Themistocles the commander liberated all Greece.
G) That servitus means servitude : FROM SERVITUDE.
Themistocles the commander liberated all Greece from
servitude.
STRUCTURE OP THE LATIN SENTENCE.
IX. The structure of a sentence is best shown by ana-
lyzing* it, and ty parsing the words which compose it.
Parsing.
XVII.2 In parsing a word,
1. Name the Part of Speech to which it belongs.
2. Inflect " it, if capable of inflection.
3. Give its gender, number, case, voice, mood, tense,
person, etc.4
4. Give its Syntax, and the Rule for it.5
TRANSLATION.
XIX. In translating, render as literally as possible with-
out doing violence to the English.
1 It has not been thought advisable to enter upon the subject of
analysts at this early stage of the course. That will be presented in the
Reader, which follows this work.
2 These suggestions arc taken, without change, from the Reader.
Accordingly, the numerals are made to correspond to those in that work.
3 Inflect; i.e., decline, compare, or conjugate.
4 That is, such of these properties as it possesses.
5 For Models for Parsing, see pp. 16, 22, 237 S3> 55> 57; 59> C6> 71>
and 73.
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
For Explanation of Abbreviations and References, see p. ix.
A.
A, &b, prep, with abl. From, by.
AccipiO, accipCre, accepi, acceptum.
To receive.
Acer, acris, acre. Sharp, severe,
valiant.
Acies, aciei, f. Order of battle, bat-
tle-array, army.
Ad, prep, with ace. To, towards,
near.
Administro, are, avi, iitum. Toad-
minister, manage.
Admoneo, admonere, admonui, ad-
mo ni turn. To admonish.
Adventus, us, m. Arrival, approach.
Adversus, prep, with ace. Against.
Aedifico, iire, avi, attim. To build.
Aestas, aestatis,^/. Summer.
AgSr, agri, m. Field, land.
Agggr, aggeris, m. Mound, ram-
part.
Agis, Agidis, m. Agis, a king of
Sparta.
Albanus, a, um. Allan.
Alexander, Alexandri, m. Alexan-
der, the Great.
Aliquis, aliqua, allquid or aliquod.
Some, some one. See 191.
Altus, a, urn. High, lofty.
Amans, umantis. Loving, fond of.
Ambulo, are, avi, atiim. To walk.
Amicitia, ae, f. Friendship.
Amiciis, a, um. Friendly.
Amicus, i, m. Friend.
Amnis, amnis, in. River.
Amo, are, avi, atum. To love.
Amor, amoris, m. Love.
Amplio, are, avi, attim. To enlarge.
Ancus, i, m. Ancus, a Roman king.
Animal, animalis, n. Animal.
Animus, i, m. Soul, mind, passion,
disposition.
Annulus, i, m. Ring.
Annils, I, m. Year.
Ante, prep, with ace. Before.
Antiques, a, um. Ancient.
Apis, apis, /. Bee.
AppellO, arS, avi, atum. To call.
Appgtens, app^tentis. Desiring,
striving for.
Apud, prep, with ace. In the pres-
ence of, near, before, a^iong.
Apulia, ae, f. Apulia, a country in
Italy.
Arabs, Arabis, in and f. Arab, an
Arab.
Arete, adv. Closely, soundly.
Argentum, i, n. Silver.
Aro, Srare, aravl. Sratum. T*
plough.
147
148
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Arrogantia, ae,/. Arrogance.
AYS, artis, / Art, skill.
Artaxerxes, is, m. Artaxerxes, a
Persian king.
Arx, arcis, /. Citadel, fortress.
Athenae, arum,/, plur. Athens, the
capital of Attica.
Atheniensis, e. Athenian.
Atheniensis, is, in. and /. Athenian,
an Athenian.
Atticus, I, m. Atticus, a Roman
name.
Audio, Ir8, m, itum. To hear.
Auditor, audltoris, m. Hearer,
auditor.
Aureus, a, iim. Golden.
Auriim, i, n. Gold.
Avaritia, ae, /. Avarice.
Avidiis, a, iim. Desirous of, eager for.
Avis, avis, f. Bird.
B.
Babylon, Babylonls, /. Babylon,
the celebrated capital of the As-
syrian Empire, on the banks of
the Euphrates.
Beatiis, a, iim. Happy, blessed.
Bellum, i, n. War, warfare.
B6ng, adv. Well
BSnigne, adv. Kindly.
Bonltas, bonitatis, /. Goodness,
excellence.
Bonus, a, iim. Good.
BrSvis, 8. Short, brief.
Brutus, i, m. Brutus, a celebrated
Roman patriot.
C.
Caesar, Caesaris, m. Ccesar, a cele-
brated Roman commander.
Caiiis, il, in. Caius, a proper
name.
Camillas, i, m. Camillus, a Roman
general.
Campus, i, m. Plain.
Canis, cams, m. andy*. Dog.
Canto, are, avi, atttm. To sing.
Cantiis, us, m. Singing, song.
Capio, capgr6, ccpi, captum. To
take, capture.
Capiit, capitis, n. Head, capital.
Carmen, carminis, n. Song, poem,
verse.
Carthaginiensis, e. Carthaginian.
Carthaginiensis, is, in. and f. A
Carthaginian.
Carthago, Carthaginis, f. Carthage,
a city of Northern Africa.
Carthago Nova. New Carthage,
Carthagena, a city of Spain.
Carus, a, iim. Dear.
Cato, Catonis, m. Cato, a distin-
guished Roman.
Centum. One hundred. See 175, 2.
Certamen, certaminis, ». Contest,
strife, battle.
Clbus, i, ?w. Food.
Cicero, Ciceronis, m. Cicero, the
celebrated Roman orator.
Civllis, d. Civil.
Civis, cms, m. and/. Citizen.
CMtas, civitatis,/. State, city.
Clarus, a, um. Renowned, distin-
guished, illustrious.
Classis, classis,/. Fleet, navy.
Coerceo, coercerd, coercui, coerci-
tiim. To check.
Colo, colere, colui, cultum. To
practise, cultivate.
Communis e. Common.
Condemno, are, avi, atiim. To con-
demn.
Conditor, conditoris, m. Founder.
Conjux, conjtigis, m . and/. Wife,
husband, spouse.
LATIN-EXGLISII VOCABULARY.
149
Cunon, Cononis, m. Conon, an
Athenian general.
Conscientia, ae,/! Consciousness.
Consilium, ii, n. Design, plan.
Conspectus, us, m. Sight, view,
presence.
Consul, consults, m. Consul.
Contra, prep, with ace. Against,
opposite to, contrary to.
Convoco, are, avi, atum. To assem-
ble, call together.
Curinthtts, I, f. Corinth, city in
Greece.
Cornelius, ii, in. Cornelius, a
Roman name.
Corona, ae,/I Crown.
Corpus, corporis, n. Body, person.
Crc6, arS, avi, atum. To create,
make, appoint, elect.
Crudelis, c. Cruel.
Crudus, a, urn. Unripe.
CulpO, are, avi, atiim. To blame.
Cum, prep, ivith all. With.
Cupidiis, &, urn. Desirous of.
Cures, Curium, m. p/ur. Cares, a
Sabine town.
Custodio, ire, ivi, itum. To guard.
Gustos, custodis, m. and/1 Keeper,
guard.
D.
De, prep, with abl. Concerning.
Debeo, debere, debui, debitum. To
owe.
Deoem. Ten. See 175.
Decimus, a, tim. Tenth.
DefectiO, defectionis, /. Eclipse.
DeflagrO, are, avi, atum. To burn,
be consumed.
Delecto, are, avl, atum. To delight,
please.
Demaratus, I, m. Demaratus, a Co-
rinthian.
Demosthenes, is, m. Demosthencst
the celebrated Athenian orator.
Diana, ae, f. Diana, the goddess
of the chase.
Dic5, dicere, dixi, dictum. To say,
speak, tell.
Dies, diei, m. Day. See 119, note.
Diligens, diligentis. Diligent.
Diligentia, ae, f. Diligence.
Dimico, are, avi, atiim. To fight.
Diony sitis, ii, m. Dionysiust tyrant
of Syracuse.
Discipuliis, I, m. Pupil.
Diserte, adv. Clearly, eloquently.
Displice5, displicerS, displicui, dis-
plicitum. To displease.
Divmus, a, um. Divine.
Dolor, doloris, HI. Pain, grief, suf-
fering.
Dono, are, avi, atum. To give, pre-
sent.
Donum, I, n. Gift.
Dormi5, ire, ivi, itum. To sleep*
Draco, Draconis, m. Draco, an
Athenian lawgiver.
Ducenti, ae, a. Two hundred.
Duco, ducere, duxl, due turn. To
lead.
Dulcis, e. Sweet, pleasant.
Duo, ae, o. Two. See 176.
DiiplicO, are, avi, atum. To double,
increase.
Dux, ducis, m. and f. Leader, gen-
eral.
E, ex, prep, with abl. From.
Ebrietas, ebrietatis,y. Drunkenness.
Educo, educere, eduxi, eductum. To
lead forth, lead out.
ftVigio, efFttgere, cffugi, effugitum.
To escape.
Ego, mel. /. See 184.
150
INTRODUCTORY LATIN UOOK.
Egrdgiiis, a, lim. Distinguished.
Egregie, adv. Excellently.
Elephanttts, i, m. Elephant.
Eloquens, eloqucntis. Eloquent.
Eloquentia, ae, f. Eloquence.
Ephesius, a, um. Ephesian, of
Ephesus.
Epiriis, i, f. Epirus, a country in
Greece.
Epistola, ae, f. Letter.
Eriidio, ire, ivi, ittim. To instruct,
refine, educate.
Eriiditus, a, um. Learned, instructed
in. "-•
Ex, prep, ivith abl. From.
Exerceo, exercere, exercui, cxcrci-
tum. To exercise, train.
Exercitiis, us, m. Army.
Expugno, are, avi, atum. To take,
take by storm.
ExspectO, are, avi, atiim. To await,
expect.
Exstil, exsttlis, m. and f. Exile.
F.
Eacies, faciei, f. Face, appearance.
Ferrum, i, «. Iron.
Fcrtilis, e. Fertile.
Fidelitas, fidelitatis, /. Fidelity,
faithfulness.
Fides, fidei, /. Faith, fidelity.
Fidus, a, tim. Faithful.
Filia, ae, /. Daughter.
Filius, ii, m. Son.
Fmio, ire, ivi, itiim. To finish,
bring to a close.
Finis, finis, m. Limit, territory.
FirmO, are, avi, atum. To strengthen,
confirm.
Flaminitis, ii, m.~ Flaminius, a Ro-
man general.
Flos, floris, m. Flower.
Foedus, a, um. Detestable.
Fons, fontis, m. Fountain.
Fortis, e. Brave.
Fortiter, adv. Bravely.
Fortitude, fortitudmis, /. Bravery,
fortitude.
Fossa, ac, /. Ditch, moat.
Frater, fratris, m. Brother.
Fructus, us, m. Fruit, produce, in-
come.
Frumentum, i, n. Corn, grain.
Fuga, ae, /. Flight.
Fugio, ftigere, fugi, fugitfun. To
flee, fly, run away.
Ftigo, are, avi, atiim. To rout,
drive away.
Funestiis, a, um. Destructive.
Ftiror, furoris, m. Madness, insanity.
G.
Gallils, i, m. Gallus, a proper name.
Galliis, i, m. Gaul, a Gaul, an in-
habitant of ancient Gaul, embra-
cing modern France.
Gemma, ae, f. Gem,
Gener, generi, m. Son-in-law.
Gens, gentis, f. Race.
Germania, ae, f. Germany.
Gladius, ii, m. Sword.
Globostts, a, um. Spherical.
Gloria, ae, f. Glory.
Graecia, ae, f. Greece.
Graecus, a, um. Grecian, Greek.
Graeciis, i, m. Greek, a Greek.
Gratia, ae, f. Favor, gratitude,
thanks.
Gratus, ii, tim. Acceptable, pleasing.
Grex, gregis, m. Herd, flock.
II.
Habco, liabere, hiibui, habitum.
To have, hold.
Habito, are, avi, atum. To dwell,
reside.
LATKv-EXG LTSII VOCAI5UL AIIY .
151
ILmnlbiXl, Ilanniballs, in. Ilanni-
lal, a celebrated Carthaginian
general.
Ilanno, Hannoms, r,i. Ilanno, a
Carthaginian general.
llasta, SLQ,f. Spear.
Hie, hacc, hoc. This.
Ilicms, hi£mis,y. Winter.
Ilirtmdo, hirundinis, f. Swallow.
Hispania, ae,/I Spain.
Hispamls, I, in. A. Spaniard.
Homerus, I, m. Homer, the cele-
brated Grecian poet.
Homo, hominis, m. Man.
Honor, honoris, m. Honor.
Hora, ac, f. Sour.
Jlostis, hostis, m. and/*. Enemy.
I.
Idem, cadem, idem. Same, the
same. Sco 18G. ,.
Ignoro, are, avi, atum. To be
ignorant of, not to know.
Hie, ilia, illud. That, he, she, it. Sec
18G.
Illustro, are, avi, atum. To illus-
trate, illumine.
Imago, imagmis, f. Imayc, picture.
Impatiens, impatientis. Impatient.
Imperator, imperatoris, m. Com-
mander.
Imperiiim, il, n. Reign, poiccr, r/ov-
crnment.
Impetus, iis, m. Attack.
Improbitas, improbitatiSjy. Vfick-
cdness.
In, prep, with ace. and all. Into,
in, within.
Inccrttts, a, urn. Uncertain.
IndicO, indicere, indixi, indictum.
To declare.
Infesto, are, avi, atiim. To infest.
Ingens, ingentis. Huge, large, great.
Innoccns, innoccntls. Innocent.
Insania, ac, f. Insanity.
Insiila, ae, f. Island.
Inter, prep, with ace. Between,
among, in the midst of.
Intro, are, avi, atiim. To enter.
Inventor, inventoris, m. Inventor.
Invito, are, avi, atum. To invite.
Ipse, ipsa, ipsiim. Self, he, himself.
See ISO.
Is, ca, id. That, he, she, it.
Iste, ista, istud. That, such. Sec 10G.
Italia, ac, /. Italy.
J.
JaciO, jacere, jeci, jactiini. To cast,
throw, hurl.
Jam, adv. Noio, already.
Jucundus, a, tim. Delightful, pleas-
ant.
Judex, judicis, m. and f. Judge.
Jungo, jungere, junxi, junctiim. To
join.
Justitia, ac, f. Justice.
Justus, it, um. Upright, just.
JuvSnis, juvenis, m. and f. A youth,
young man.
Juventus, juventutis, /. Youth, a
youth, a young person.
L.
Labor, laboris, m. Labor.
LaborS, arS, avi, atttm. To strive
for, labor, worlc.
LacSdaemonitts, ii, m. Spartan, a
" Spartan, inhabitant of Sparta in
Greece.
Laetltia, ae, f. Joy.
Lapis, lapidis, m. Stone.
Latme, adv. In Latin.
Latimls, I, m. Latinus, a Latin
king.
Latus, a, tim. Broad.
152
IXTEODUCTOEY LATIN BOOK.
Lauda,biiio, c. Pfcusstcorthy, lauda-
ble,
LaudO, tire, avi, iltiim. To praise.
Laus, laudls,^ Praise.
Lavmiti, ac, f. Lavinia, a proper
name.
Legatio, Icgati6nls,y*. Embassy.
Legatus, I, m. Ambassador.
LCgio, legionis, y*. Legion, a body
of soldiers.
L'jgo, legere, iGgl, Icctur.i. jfo
choose, appoint.
Leo, leonis, m. Lion.
Letalis, c. Mortal, deadly.
Lex, legls,yi £au?.
Liber, libri, m. Boole. <&
LiberS, are, avi, atiim. To liberate.
Libertas, Hbertatis, f. Libert j.
Longiis, a, um. Long.
Luciis, i, m. Grove.
Luna, ae, f. Moon.
Luscmia, ac, f. Nightingale.
Lux, lucis, f. Light.
Luxiiria, ae, f. Luxury.
Lycurgtts, I, m. Lycurrjus, a Spartan
lawgiver.
Ly sander, Lysandii, m.' Ly sunder,
a Spartan general.
Macedonia, ae,jf. Macedonia, Mace-
don, a country of Northern Greece.
Magister, magistri, m. Master,
teacher.
Magnop2re, adv. Greatly.
Magnus, a, um. Great, large.
Maltim, I, n. Evil.
MarceMs, I, m. Marcettus, a cele-
brated Roman general.
MarS, maris, n. Sea.
Mater, matris, f. Mother.
Maturtis, a, um. Ripe.
MSmoria, ac, f. Memory.
Mensa, ac, /. Table.
Mensis, mensis, m. Month.
Merces, mercedis, /. Reward.
Mereo, mSrere, mcrui, meritum.
To deserve, merit.
Metis, a, inn. My. Sec 185.
Miles, militis, m. Soldier.
Miltiades, is, m. Miltiades, an Athe-
nian general.
Modestia, ac, f. Modesty.
MoncO, monere, monui, momtum.
To advise.
Mons, mentis, m. Mountain.
Monstro, are, uvl, atiim. To shoic,
point out.
Mora, ac, /. Delay.
Mors, mortis, f. Death.
Multitiido, multitudinis, /. Multi-
tude.
Multus, li, urn. Much, many.
Mundus, I, m. World, universe.
Munio, ire, ivi, ittim. To fortify,
defend.
Muniis, muneris, n. Gift, present.
Murus, i, m. Wall.
Mutatio, miitationis, f. Change,
phase.
N.
Natfilis, c. Belonging to one's birth,
natal.
Natalis dies. Birth-day.
Natura, ae, f. Nature.
Navalis, C . Naval.
Navigo, are, avi, atttm. To sail to.
Navis, navis, / Ship.
Necessarius, a, um. Necessary.
Necessitas, neccssitatis,y. Necessity.
NCpos, nepotis, m. Grandson.
Nobilis, e. Nobk.
NomSn, no minis, n. Name.
NominB, are, avi, atiim. To call,
name.
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Nun, ado. Not.
NonnS, interrog. part. Expects the
answer, Yes. See 346, II., 2.
Noster, nqstra, nostrum. Our, our
own, ours.
Novitas, novitatis, f. Novelty.
Novus, a, um. New.
Nox, noctis, f. Night.
Niibes, nubis, /. Cloud.
Num, interrog. part. Expects the
answer, No. See 346, II., 1.
Niima, ae, m. Numa, a Roman king.
Numeriis, I, m. Number, quantity.
Nummiis, I, m. Money, a piece of
money, a coin.
Nuntio, arg, avi, atiim. To proclaim,
announce.
0.
ObsSs, obsidis, m. and f. Hostage.
Occasus, us, m. Setting, going down.
Occtipd, ar£, avi, atiim. To occupy,
take possession of.
Octavus, a, um. Eighth .
Octo. Eight. See 175, 2.
Octoginta. Eighty. See 175, 2.
Oculus, I, m. Eye.
Odiosus, a, um. Odious, hateful.
Omnis, e. All, every, whole.
Oppidum, i, n. Town, city.
Oppugno, ar£, avi, atum. To be-
siege, take by storm.
Opt5, are, avi, atum. To wish for,
desire.
Optilentus, a, um. Rich, opulent.
Opus, opSris, n. Work.
Orati5, orationis,^ Oration, speech.
Orator, oratoris, m. Orator.
Orbis, orbis, m. Circle.
Orbis terrariim. The world.
Orno, ard, avi, atum. To adorn, be
an ornament to.
Ovls, ovis,^. Sheep.
P.
Parens, parcntis, m. and/. Parent.
Parco, parere, purul, paritum. To
obey.
Pars, partis, f. Part, portion.
Parvus, a, um. Small.
Passer, passeiis, m. Sparrow.
Pastor, pastoris, m. Shepherd.
PatSr, patiis, m. Father.
Patria, ac, f. Native country, coun-
try.
Pauliis, I, m. Paulus, a Roman
consul.
Pax, pacis,/ Peace.
Pecunia, ae,/ Money.
Peltfs, pellis,/. Skin, hide.
Per, prep, with ace. Of, through.
Peragrd, arC, avi, atum. To wan-
der through.
Pgritus, a, um. Skilled in.
Persa, ae, m. A Persian.
Pes, p£dis, m. Foot.
Philippus, i, m. Philip, king of
Macedon.
Philosophia, ae,/. Philosophy.
Philosophus, i, m. Philosopher.
Pietas, pietatis,/ Filial affection,
piety, duty.
Pirata, ae, m. Pirate.
Piscis, piscis, m. Fish.
Pisistratus, i, m. Pisistratus, tyrant
of Athens.
PlaceO, placere, placui, placitum.
To please.
Pleniis, a, lim. Full.
Poenus, fi, um. Carthaginian.
Poenus, i, m. A Carthaginian.
Pomum, i, n. Fruit.
Pompilitis, ii, m. Pompilius, a
Roman name.
Pompeiiis, ii, m. Pompey, a cole-
brated Roman general.
Pondus, ponderis, n. Weight, mass.
154
INTRODUCTORY LATIN" BOOK.
Portus, us, 77i. Port, harbor.
Post, prep, with ace. After.
Potens, potentis. Powerful, able.
Praebeo, praebere, praebui, praebi-
tum. To show, furnish, give.
Praeceptor, praeceptoris, m. Teacher,
instructor.
Praeceptum, i, n. Rule, precept.
Praeclarus, a, urn. Renowned, dis-
tinguished.
Praedico pracdicere, praedixi, prae-
dictiim. To predict, foretell.
Praemium, ii, n. Reward.
Pratum, i, n. Meadow.
Pretiosus, a, urn. Valuable.
Primus, a, um. First.
Principium, ii, n. Beginning.
Pro, prep, with all. In behaJf of,
for.
Proelium, ii, n. Battle.
ProspCre, adv. Successfully.
ProvocO, arS, avi, atiim. To chal-
lenge.
Prudential, ae, f. Prudence.
Publius, ii, JR. Publius, a Roman
name.
Puella, ae, /. Girl.
Puer, pueii, m. Boy.
PugnJt, ae, f. Battle.
PugnO, are, avi, atiim. To fight.
Pulchgr, pulchra, pulchrum. Beauti-
ful.
Puniciis, a, tim. Carthaginian,
Punic.
Pyrrhus, i, m. Pi/rrhus, a king of
Epirus.
Q.
Quanij conj. Than.
Quartiis, a, um. Fourth.
Quattuor. Four. See 175, 2.
Qui, quae, quod, rel. pronoun. Who,
which, what. See 187.
Quinquaginta. Fifty. See 175, 2
Quinque. Five. See 175, 2.
Quintus, a, tim. Fifth.
Quis, quac, quid ? interrog. pronoun.
Who, which, what? See 188.
Quivis, quaevis, quodvis, or quidvis,
indef. pronoun. Whoever, whatever.
See 191.
Quotidianus, a, um. Daily.
Quotidie, adv. Daily.
R.
Ramus, i, m. Branch.
Riitio, ratio nls,f. Reason.
Recte, adv. Rightly.
Rectum, i, n. Right, rectitude.
Rgduco, rSducgrS, reduxi, rSductum.
To lead back.
Regin£, ae, f. Queen.
RSgio, regionis, f. Region, terri-
tory.
Regulus, I, m. Regulus, a Roman
general.
Regno, are, avi, atiim. To reign.
Regniim, I, n. Kingdom, royal author-
ity.
Rego, regere, rexi, rectum. To
rule.
Renovo, arS, avi, atum. To renew.
Res, rei,y Thing, affair.
Res publica. Republic.
Revocd, ar5, avi, atiim. To recall.
Rex, regls, m. King.
Rheniis, i, m. Rhine.
RomS,, ae,/; Rome.
Romantts, a, iim. Roman.
Romanus, I, m. Roman, a Roman.
Romulus, i, m. Romulus, the found-
er of Rome.
Saguntum, 1^71. Saguntum, a town
in Spain.
L ATIX-KXG LISH VOCABULARY.
155
Salus, salutis,/ Safety.
Salutaris, e. Benejicial, salutary,
advantageous.
Saluto, are, avi, atum. To salute.
Sanctus, a, urn. Holy, sacred*
Sapiens, sapientis. Wise.
Sapienter, adv. Wisely.
Sapientia, ac, f. Wisdom.
Schola, ae, f. School.
Scientia, ae, f. Knowledge.
Scipio, Scipionis, m. Scipio, a dis-
tinguished Roman.
Sciibo, scrlbere, scrips!, scriptthn.
To write.
Scythae, arum, m. plur. The Scythi-
ans.
Secundus, a, um. Second, favor-
able.
SempCr, adv. Always, ever.
Senator, senatoris, m. Senator.
SSnatiis, us, m. Senate.
Senectus, sSnectutis, f. Old age.
Sensiis, us, m* Feeling, perception,
sense.
Sententia, ae, f. Opinion.
SermO, sermonis, m. Discourse, con-
versation.
ServiS, ire, ivi, itum. To serve.
Serviiis, ii, m. Servius, a Roman
proper name.
Servo, are, avl, utum. To preserve,
keep, save.
Servus, I, m. Slave.
Sex. Six. See 175, 2.
Sicilia, ae,/. Sicily.
Silentium, ii, n. Silence.
Similis, S. Like.
Singularis, e. Remarkable, singular.
Socer, socfiii, m. Father-in-law.
Socius, ii, m. Ally, associate.
Socrates, is, m. Socrates, the cele-
brated Athenian philosopher.
Sol, solis, m. Sun.
Solon, Solonis, m. Solon, an Athe-
nian legislator. •
Soltim, i, n. Soil.
Sparta, ae, /. Sparta, capital of
Laconia.
SpScies, specie!, f. Appearance.
Spero, are, avi, atum. To hope.
Spes, spei,/. Hope.
Spolio, are, avi, atiim. To rob,
spoil, despoil.
Stimulo, are, avi, atum. To stimu-
late.
Stultitia, ae,/. Folly.
Sul, sibi. Himself, herself, itself.
See 184.
Sum, essg, fin. To be. See 204.
Siipero, are, avi, atiim. To conquer.
Supplicium, ii, n. Punishment.
Sutts, a, um. His, her, its, their,
his own, her own, its own, their
own.
Syracusae, arum,/ ptur. Syracuse,
a city of Sicily.
T.
TaceO, tacere, tacui, tacitiim. To
be silent.
Tarentum, I, n. Tarentitm, an Ital-
ian town.
Tarquinius, ii, m. Tarquin, a Ro-
man king.
Teltim, i, n. Javelin, weapon.
TemSritas, temeritatis, / Rashness,
Templiim, I, n. Temple.
Tempus, temporis, n. Time.
Terra, ae, /. Land, earth.
TerreO, terrerS, terrui, teiTitum. To
frighten, terrify.
Tertiiis, a, um. Third.
Thales, is, m. Tholes, a Grecian
philosopher.
Thebantis, a, um. Theban, belonging
to Thebes (a city in Greece).
156
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Thebantis, I, m. A Theban.
ThemistOcles, is, m. T/iemistodes, a
celebrated Athenian.
Thrasybultis, i, m. Thrasybulus, the
liberator of Athens.
Ticintis, I, m. Ticinus, a river of
Cisalpine Gaul.
Tres, tria. Three. Sec 176.
Triginta. Thirty. See 175, 2.
Triumpho, are, avi, atiim. To tri-
umph.
Troja, ae, f. Troy, ancient city in
Asia Minor.
Tu, tin. Thou, you. See 184.
Tullia, ae, f. Tullia, a Roman
proper name.
Tullus, I, m. Tullus, a Roman king.
Turn, adv. Then, at that time.
Turris, turris, /. Tower.
Tutis, a, tim. Your, yours, thy, thine.
Tyrannus, i, in. Tyrant.
Tyritis, a, tim. Tyrian.
U.
Ulysses, is, in. Ulysses, a Grecian
king.
Universes, a, tim. All, the whole,
entire.
Untis, a, tim. One. See 176.
Urbs, urbis, /. City.
Ustis, us, m. Use.
Utilis, e. Useful.
V.
Valetudo, valetudinis, /. Health.
Varic'tas, variStatis, f. Variety.
Varitis, a, tim. Various.
VarrO, varronis, m. Varro, a Roman
consul.
Yer, veris, n. Spring.
Verbum, I, w. Word.
Verecundia, ae, f. Modesty.
Yeritas, veritatis, /. Trutht verity.
Yertis, a, tim. True, real.
Yerum, i, n. Truth.
Yester, vestra, vestrum. Your.
YestiO, ire, M, ittim. To clothe.
Yia, ae,/. Way, road.
Yictor, victoris, m. Victor, con-
queror.
Victoria, ae,/. Victory.
Victoria, ae,/. Victoria, Queen of
England.
VigilS, are, avi, atum. To watcn,
be awake.
Vills, C. Cheap.
Vindex, vindicis, in. and/. Vindi-
cator, avenger.
Viol5, arS, avi, atiim. To violate.
Vir, viri, ?7i. Man, hero, soldier.
VirgO, virginis,/. Maiden, girl.
Virtus, virtutis,/ Valor, virtue.
Vita, ae,/. Life.
Vititim, ii, n. Fault, vice.
Vittiper5, are, avi, attim. To find
fault ivith, censure, blame.
Vivo, vivere, vixi, victtim. To lii-e,
Beside.
Y6c5, are, avi, atum. To call.
Vol5, are, avi, atum. Toflij.
Voluntarius, a, um. Voluntary.
Yoluptas, voluptatis,/. Pleasure.
Vox, vocis,/. Voice.
VulnSrO, arg, avi, attim. To wound.
Yulntis, vulneris, n. Wound.
Vulttir, vulturis, m. Vulture.
Yulttis, us, ??i. Countenance.
X.
Xerxes, is, m. Xerxes, a Persian
king;.
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
A.
A, an. Not to be translated, as the
Latin has no article. See p. 12,
note 1.
Acceptable. Grdtus, a, urn.
Admonish. Admdneo, admonere, ad-
mSnul,jadmonltum.
Adorned. Orndtus, a, urn.
Advise. Moneo, mtfnere', mffnui, monl-
tum.
After. Post, prep, with ace.
Against. Contra, prep, with ace.
Sometimes denoted by the Dative.
Alexander. Alexander, Alexandn, m.
All. Omnls, <T.
Always. Semper, adv.
Announce. Nuntio, are, din, at am.
Appoint. Cred, are, art, dtum.
Army. Exercltus, us, m.
Arrival. Adventus, us, m.
At. Denoted by the Ablative of Place,
or of Time. See 421 and 426.
Athenian. Atheniensls, P.
Athenian, an Athenian. Athenien-
sis, is, m. and f.
Athens. Athenae, drum, f. plur.
Attack. Impetus, us, m.
Await. Exspecto, are, del, alum.
B.
Battle. Proelium, il, n.
Battle-array. Ades, el, f.
Be. Sum, ess?, fui.
Be silent. Tdceo, tacerff, idem, ta&
turn.
Beautiful. PulcMr, pulchra, pul
chrum.
Before. Ante', prep, with ace.
Bird. Avis, avis, f.
Birth-day. Ndtdlls dies, m.
Blame. Vltup&ro, are, dvl, dtum.
Book. Liber, fibri, m.
Boy. Puer,puerl, in.
Brave. Forils, e.
Bravely. Fortltgr, adv.
Bravery. Virtus, virtutls, f.
Bring to a close. Flnio, ir£, ivi^
Hum.
Brother. Frdter,frdtrls, m.
Brutus. Brutus, I, m.
By. A, ab, prep, with abl. Often
denoted by the Ablative alone.
See 414.
Cains. Cdius, il, m.
Call. Vtico, are', dvl, alum.
Camillus. CamiRus, I, m.
Can, can have. See incy, ??ioy
have.
Carthage. CartlidyD, CarthdgZnis. f.
Carthaginian. Carthdglniensls. &.
Carthaginian, a Carthaginian. Car-
tlidglniensls, Is, m. and f.
Cato. CatS, Catonls, m.
Cicero. Cicero, Cic&rd)>t*, m
157
158
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Citizen. Clcis, clvls, m. and f.
City. Urbs, urbis, f.
Cloud. Nubes, nulls, f.
Commander. Impgrdtor, imperd-
tons, m.
Concerning. De, prep, with abl.
Consul. Consul, consults, m.
Contrary to. Contra, prep, with
ace.
Conversation. Sermo, sermoitis, m.
Corinth. Cdrinthus, I, f.
Corinthian. Ctfrinthius, a, urn.
Corinthian, a Corinthian. Corintld-
us, it, m.
Cornelius. Cornelius, il, m.
Could, could have. See might, might
have.
Country. Patria, ae, f.
Courage. Virtus, virtutts, f.
Crown. Corona, ae, f.
D.
Daily. Quotldidnus, a, um.
Daughter. Filia, ae, f.
Day. Dies, diel, m. See 11 9, note.
Dear. Cdrus, a, um.
Declare. Indlcd, indlcere, indixl,
indicium.
Delight. Delecto, dre~, am., alum.
Desirous of. Cupidus, a, um ; uui-
dus, a, um.
Did. Often the sign of the Imperfect,
or of the Perfect tense, especially in
questions.
Diligence. Diltgentia, ae, f.
Diligent. DlUgens, diligentis.
Do. Often the sign of the Present
tense, especially in questions.
E.
Eight. Octo. See 175, 2.
Eighth. Octavus, a, um.
Enemy Hostts, fiostts, m. and f.
Exercise. Exerceo, exerccre', excrcult
exercUum.
Exile. Exsul, exsulis, m. and f.
Expect. Exspecio, are, del, alum-
F.
Father. Pater, patns, m.
Father-in-law. Stic&r, soceri, m.
Fertile. Fertilis, e.
Fidelity. Fides, fidtl, f.
Field. Ag&r, dgri, m.
Fifth. Quintus, a, um.
Fifty. Quinqudgintd. See 175, 2.
Fight. Pitgno, are, dvl, dtum.
Finish. Flnio, Ire, wi, Hum.
Five. Qainquc. See 175, 2.
Flee. Fugio, fugSre, fucjl, fufitum.
Flower. Flos, floris, m.
Fly. Volo, are, dvl, dtum.
Foot. Pes, pcdis, m.
Fond of. Amans, amantls.
For. Pro, prep, with abl. In tha
sense of because of, it is denoted
by the Ablative alone (414) ; and
in the sense of for the benefit of,
by the Dative (384).
Fortify. Munio, ire, lul, Itwn,
Four. Quattuor. See 175, 2.
Fourth. Quartus, a, iim.
Friend. Amlcus, I, m.
Friendship. Amicitia, ae, f.
From. A, ab, prep, with abl.
Fruit. Fractus, us, m.
Garden. Ilortus, I, m.
Gaul. Callus, I, m.
Gem. Gemma, ae, f.
General. Dux, duels, m. and f.
Gift. Donum, I, n.
Glory. Gloria, ae, f.
Gold. Aurum, I, n.
Golden. "Jiureus, a, um.
KXC, LTSII-LATIN VOCABULABT.
159
Good. Bonus, a, um.
Goodness. Bonitds, lonitdiis, f.
Govern. R&jo, regere, rcxl, rectum.
Great. Magnus, a, um.
Greece. Graecid, ae, f.
Grove. Lucus, I, m.
Guard. Cusiodio, Ire, id, Hum.
II.
Had. Often the sign of the Pluper-
fect tense.
Hannibal. Hannibal, Hanntlalis, in.
Happy. Bedtus, a, um.
Have. Ildbeo, habere, habul, hdlltum.
Sometimes simply the sign of the
Perfect tense ; as, we have loved.
He, she, it. 7s, cd, id; ille, ilia,
illud. The pronoun is often im-
plied in the ending of the verb.
He himself. Ips?, ipsd, ipsum.
Hear. Audio, Ire, ui, Itum.
High. Altus, alia, ahum.
Himself. Sul (184); ipse, ipsd,
ipsum.
His. Suus, a, um.
Hope (verb). Spero,drc, ad, alum.
Hope (noun). Spes, spel, f.
Hour. Ilord, ae, f.
Hundred. Centum. Sec 175, 2.
I. . Efjo, mei. Sec 184.
In. In, prep, with abl.
In behalf of. Pro, prep, with abl.
Instruct. Erudio, Ire, wl, Itum.
Instructor. PraecepWr, praeceptorls,
m.
Into. In, prep, with ace.
Invite. Invlto, are, del, dtuin.
Iron. Ferrum, I, n.
Island. Insuld, ae, f.
It. Sec he, she, it.
Italy. Iialitt, ae, f.
J.
Judge. Judcx, judicislm. and f.
Justice. Justitid, ae, f.
Keep one's word. Fldem se.rvdre.
Sec p. 74, note 4.
Kindly. B&nignc, adv. •
King. Rex, regis, m.
Knowledge. Scientia, ae, f.
L.
Large. Magnus, a, um.
Latinus. Ldtlnus, I, m.
Lavinia. Ldvlnia, ae, f.
Law. Lex, leyis, f.
Lead. Duco, ducerc, duxi, ductum.
Lead back. Reducu, reduce re, r?-
duxl, redact um.
Lead forth. Educo, cducere, edaxl,
eductum.
Let. Render by the Subjunctive. See
196, L, 2.
Leader. Diix,_ducis, m. and f.
Letter. Epistola, ae, f.
Liberate. Llbero, are, dti, dium.
Life. Vita, ae, f.
Like. SimiltSj e.
Love. Amo, are, del, dtum.
M.
Macedonia. Macedonia, ae, f.
Man. Homo, hSmims, m. Vir, viri,
in. The latter is used as a term
of respect ; a true or ivorthy man,
a hero.
Many. Multl, ae, a, plur.
May, can. Signs of the Present Sub-
junctive.
May have, can have. Signs of the
Perfect Subjunctive.
Me. Sec 7.
Memory. Jlfemfiria, ae, f.
160
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Might, could, would, should. Signs
of the Imperfect Subjunctive.
Might have, could have, would
have, should have. Signs of the
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
Mind. Animus, I, m.
Moat. Fossa, ae, f.
Money. ~Pecunia, ae, f.
Month. Mcnsis, mensis, m.
More. Sign of the Comparative
degree. See 160.
Most. Sign of the Superlative degree.
See 160.
Mound. Agger, aggcrts, m.
Mountain. Mons, montis, m.
Much. Multtim, adv.
My. Metis, a, um. See 185.
N.
Name. Nomen, nummis, n.
Nightingale. Luscinia, ae, f.
Noble. Ndbllis, e.
Not. Non, adv. Interrogative,
nonne.
0.
Obey. Pdreo, pdrere, pdrul, pdri-
tum.
Observe. Servo, are, dvl, dtum.
Occupy. Occupo, dr&, dvl, dtum.
Of. Denoted by the Genitive. See
393.
Of itself. Per se.
On. Often denoted by the Ablative of
Time. See 426.
One. Unus, a, um. See 176.
Oration. Or at id, ordtionis, f.
Orator. Ordttfr, ordtons, m.
Our. Noster, tra, trum.
P.
Parent. P&rcns, parentts, m. and f.
Philip. P/ulippus, I, m.
Pisistratus. Pisistratus, I, m.
Please. Placeo, placerc, placul,
placitum.
Pleasing. Grdtus, a, um.
Pleasure. Vtiluptds, vtiluptdXs, f.
Plough. Aro, ardre, ardvl, ardtani.
Plunder (verb). Spdlio, arc, dri,
dtum.
Practise. ExcrccO, excrcere, excrctri,
exercitum.
Praise (verb). Laudo, are, art,
dtum.
Praise (noun). Laus, laudts, f.
Precept. Praeceptum, I, n.
Predict. Praedlco, pracdlcere, prae-
dixl, praedictum.
Present (noun). Donum, I. n.
Publius. Publius, it, m.
Punish. Punio, ire, Ivl, Itum.
Pupil. Discipulus, I, m.
Put to flight. Fugo, are, dvl, dtum.
Q.
Queen. Reglna, ae, f.
R.
Receive. Accipid, accip&re, accept,
acceptum.
Reign, royal authority. Regnum,
I, n.
Renowned. Cldms, a, um.
Reside. IJabito, dr&, dvl, dtum.
Rhine. Rhenus, I, m.
River. Amnis, amnis, m.
Roman. Rdmdnus,*a, um.
Roman, a Roman. Rdmdnus, I, in.
Rome. Roma, ae, f.
Romulus. Romulus, I, m.
Rule. Regd, regcrtf, rcxl, rectum.
Safety. Salus, salults, f.
' Same.. Idem, cade"m, idem. Sec 186.
1 S;iv. DTcoTdlcc'rc, dixl, dictum.
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
161
Save. Servo, are, del, dtum.
Scipio. Sdpio, Sclpionis, ni.
Senator. Sendtffr, senators, in.
Serve. Servio, Ire, ii'l, Itum.
Scrvius. Servius, il, m.
Setting. Occdsiis, us, m.
8 hall, will. Signs of the Future
tense.
Shall have, will have. Signs of the
Future Perfect tense.
Shepherd. Pasttfr, pastorls, in.
Should, should have. Sec might,
might have.
Show. Monstro, are, del, dtum.
Sicily. Sicilid, ae, f.
Silent. See be silent.
Silver. Argentum, I, n.
Sing. Canto, are, del, alum.
Singing, a song. Cantus, m, m.
Six. Sex. See 175, 2.
Slave. Seruus, I, m.
Sleep. Dor mid, ire, wl, Hum.
Soldier. Miles, mllitis, m.
Somebody, somo one. Aliqnis,
ahqua, aiqnid, or ahqudd. Sec
191.
Son. Fllius, it, m.
Son-in-law. Geuer, generl, in.
Song. Carmen, carminls, n.
Speak. Dlco, dlcere, dixl, dictum.
State. Clultds, clcltdtis, f.
Strengthen. Firmo, arc, del, dfiim.
Sun. Sol, soils, m.
Sunset. Occdsus softs.
Sword. Gladius, il, m.
Take. Capio, capere, ccpl, captain.
Take by storm. Expuyno, are, del,
dtum.
Tarquin. Tarqiuniiis, it, m.
Tell. Died, dice re', dixl, dictum.
Temple. Templum, I, n.
Ten. Decem. Sec 1/5, 2.
Terrify. TerreO, terrere, terrul, fcrri-
turn.
Than. Qi.iam. Often omitted, in
which case the Ablative follows.
See 417.
That. Ille, ilia, HIM. See 18G
The. Not to be translated y <(i t.'.-".
Latin has no article. See p. 1 2,
note 1.
Their. Situs, a, um.
Then. Turn, adv.
Thing. Res, rel, f.
This. Etc, haec, hoc. Sec 186.
Three. Tres, trid. Sec 176.
Time. Tempus, temporis, n.
To.' Ad, in, preps, with ace. To
is sometimes denoted by the
Accusative, and sometimes by th?
Dative. Sec 370 and 384
True. Verus, a, um.
Truth. Vcrum, I, n.
Tullia. Tallin, ae, f.
Two. Duo, duae, duo. See 176.
Tyrant. Tyrannus^ 7, in.
Use. Us us, us, m.
Useful. Uttlis, e.
V.
Valor. Virtus, virtutis, f.
Valuable. Pretiosus, a, um.
Very. Sometimes the sign of
Superlative. Sec 160.
Victoria. Victoria, ac, f.
Victory. Victoria, ae, f.
Violate. Violo, are, dvl, dtum.
Virtue. Virtus, virtutis, f.
IK.
Walk. Atnbulo, arc", dvl, dtum.
War. Bell&n, I, n.
162
INTRODUCTORY LATIN BOOK.
Way. Via, ac, f.
Well. Bcne, adv.
Who, which (relative). Qul, quae,
quod. Sec 187.
Who, which, what (interrogative) 1
Qius, quae, quid? qul, quae, quSd?
Sec 188.
Wide. Lotus, a, urn.
Wife. Conjux, conjugis, f.
Will, will have. Sec shall, shall
have.
Winter. , Iliems, hie mis, f.
Wisdom. Sapient ia, ac, f.
Wise. Sapiens, sapicntts.
With. Cum, prep, with abl. Often
denoted by the Ablative alone.
Sec 414.
Word. Verbum, I, n. To keep one's
word, fidem servdrc. Sec p. 74,
note 4.
Would, would have. Sec 'might,
might have.
Wound. Vulnero, are, dvi, alum.
Write. Scribo, scrlbere, scripsl, scrip-
turn.
Y.
Year. Annus, i, m.
You. Tii, till. Sec 184.
Your. THUS, a, u:n ; vcster, vcstra,
vcslrum.
Yourself. Tu, tu ips£.
.
UITI7BI15ITT
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Harkness's Elements of Latin Grammar.
This work is intended especially for those who do not contemplate
a collegiate course, but it may be successfully used in any school where,
for special reasons, a small grammar is deemed desirable. The beginner
needs to store his mind at the outset with the laws of the language in
such forms of statement as he can carry with him throughout his whole
course of study. The convenience and interest of the student in this
regard have been carefully consulted in the preparation of this manual.
All the paradigms, rules, and discussions, have been introduced in the
exact language of the author's Grammar, by which it may at any time
be supplemented. While, therefore, in many schools this work will be
found a sufficient Latin Grammar, it may be used in others, either as
preparatory to the larger Grammar, or in connection with it.
No separate references to this volume will ever be needed in editions
of Latin authors, as the numbering of the articles is the same as in the
larger Grammar.
From Pros. COBLEIGH, Tennessee Wesley-
an University.
" This work is very timety. I regard
it as indispensabie in many schools in the
South."
From Prof. W. TT. YOUNG, Ohio Uni-
versity.
" I most heartily commend this work.
I have for some time felt its need. It
seems to make your Latin course com-
plete.1'
From Prof. C. G. HUDSON, Genesee Wes-
leyan Seminary, Lima, N. Y.
" I can heartily recommend it. I think
that it is superior to all rivals."
From Prof. IT. D. WALKER, Orangemlle
Academy, Pa.
41 In my opinion, no work of Professor
llarkness will be more widely used, or
more valuable, than this. It supplies a
want long felt by teachers. It is clear,
thorough, and sufficiently extended for
ordinary students."
From Prof. S. II. MANLEY, Cornell Col-
lege, Iowa.
" I think it one of the finest compendi-
ums of Grammar I have ever seen. It
must prove of great service as a prepara-
tory drill-book."
From Prof. L. F. PARKER, Iowa College.
" I feel under personal obligation for
this new incentive and aid to classical
study."
From II. F. LANE, High Sc7wol, Temple-
ton, Mass.
"It is exactly adapted to our wants.
We use all of Ilarkness's books — Gram-
mar, Eeader, and Composition. We con-
sider them emphatically ' the best.' "
From Prof. J. A. KELLER, Heidelberg
College, Ohio.
" I was surprised to find so full an out-
line of Latin Grammar comprised within
such narrow limits."
From Prof. M. B. BROWN, Notre - Dame
University.
"In my opinion, it is just the book
which has long been needed. It is a book
to be learned entire, and is complete as far
as it goes. Prof. Harkness deserves the
thanks both of students and teachers."
From "Rev. B. G. NORTHROP, Secretary
of Board of Education, Conn.
" I am highly pleased with Harkness's
Elements of Latin Grammar. Its brevity
commends it for beginners and for all
contemplating a partial Latin course of
study."
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
HAEKNESS'S LATIN GEAMMAE.
12mo, 355 pages.
Although this work has been published but a short time comparatively, it is recom-
mended by and introduced into a large number of Colleges and Classical Schools, among
which are the following:
BOWDOIN COLLEGE, Brunswick, Me.
BATES COLLEGE, Lewiston, Maine.
LEWISTON FALLS ACADEMY, Auburn, Me.
DOVER HIGH SCHOOL, Dover, N. H.
DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, Hanover, N. II.
NORWICH UNIVERSITY, Norwich, Vt.
GLENWOOD LADIES1 SEMINARY, Brattleboro, Vt.
AMHEEST COLLEGE, Amhcrst, Mass.
TUFTS COLLEGE, Medford, Mass.
PHILLIPS ACADEMY, Andover, Mass.
STATE NORMAL SCHOOL, Framingham, Mass.
HIGHLAND SCHOOL, Worcester, Mass.
NEWTON HIGH SCHOOL, Newton, Mass.
PUBLIC HIGH SCHOOL, Springfield, Mass.
ROXBURY LATIN SCHOOL, Roxbury, Mass.
LAWRENCE ACADEMY, Groton, Mass.
AUBURNDALE FEMALE SEMINARY, Auburndale, Mass.
SPENCER ACADEMY, Spencer, Mass.
JAMAICA PLAIN HIGH SCHOOL, Jamaica Plain, Mass.
BROWN UNIVERSITY, Providence, R. I.
UNIVERSITY GRAMMAR SCHOOL, Providence, R. I.
PUBLIC HIGH SCHOOL, Providence, R. I.
FRIENDS1 BOARDING SCHOOL, Providence, R. I.
WARREN HIGH SCHOOL, Warren, R. I.
PROVIDENCE CONFERENCE SEMINARY, East Greenwich, R. L
WESLEYAN UNIVERSITY, Middletown, Ct.
FREE ACADEMY, Norwich, Ct.
NEW LONDON ACADEMY, New London, Ct.
YALE COLLEGE, New Haven, Ct.
ROCHESTER UNIVERSITY, Rochester, N. Y.
MADISON UNIVERSITY, Hamilton, N. Y.
COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK.
CORTLAND ACADEMY, Homer, N. Y.
OSWEGO HIGH SCHOOL, Oswego, N. Y.
HAMILTON COLLEGE, Clinton, N. Y.
HOBART FREE COLLEGE, Geneva, N. Y.
CANANDAIGUA ACADEMY, Canandaigua, N. Y.
NEWTON HIGH SCHOOL, Newton, N. J.
HAVERFORD COLLEGE, West Haverford, Pa.
CLASSICAL AND MILITARY SCHOOL, Columbia, Pa-
SHURTLEFF COLLEGE, Upper Alton, 111.
IOWA STATE UNIVERSITY, Iowa City, Iowa.
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, Ann Arbor, Mich.
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Harkness's Latin Grammar.
From Eev. Prof. J. J. OWEN, D. D., New York Free Academy.
" I have carefully examined Harkness's Latin Grammar, and am so well pleased witb
its plan, arrangement, and execution, that I shall take the earliest opportunity of intro-
ducing it as a text-book in the Free Academy."
From Mr. JOHN D. PHILBRICK, Superintendent of Public Schools, Boston, Mass.
" This work is evidently no hasty performance, nor the compilation of a mere book
maker, but tho well-ripened fruit of mature aud accurate scholarship. It is eminently
practical, because it is truly philosophical."
From Mr. G. N. BIGELOW, Principal of State Normal School, FramingJiam, Mass.
" Uarkness's Latin Grammar is the most satisfactory text-book I have ever used."
From Eev. DANIEL LEACH, Superintendent Public Scliools, Providence, R. I.
" I am quite confident that it is superior to any Latin Grammar before the public. It
has recently been introduced into the High School, and all are much pleased with it."
From Dr. J. B. CHAPIN, State Conmissioner of Public Instruction in Rhode Island.
"The vital principles of the language are clearly and beautifully exhibited. The
work needs no one's commendation.1'
From Mr. ABNER J. PHIPPS, Superintendent of Public Schools, Loicell, Mass.
"The aim of the author seems to be fully realized in making this 'a tisefu-l book, and
fti such I can cheerfully commend it. The clear and admirable manner in which the in-
tricacies of the Subjunctive Mood are unfolded, is one of its marked features.
"The evidence of ripe scholarship and of familiarity with the latest works of GerrnaD
and English philologists is manifest throughout the book."
From Dr. J. T. CHAMPLIN, President of Waterville College.
. " I like both the plan and the execution of the work very much. Its matter and
manner are both admirable. I shall be greatly disappointed if it does not at once win the
public favor."
From Prof. A. S. PACKARD, Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Maine.
" Harkness's Latin Grammar exhibits throughout the results of thorough scholarship.
I shall recommend it in our next catalogue."
From. Prof. J. J. ST ANTON, Bates College.
"' We have introduced Harkness's Grammar into this Institution. It is much more
logical and concise than any of its rivals."
From Mr. WM. J. EOLFE, Principal Cambridge ITigJi ScJwol.
"Notwithstanding all the inconveniences that must attend a change of Latin Gram-
mars in a large school like mine, I shall endeavor to secure the adoption of Harkness's
Grammar in place of our present text-book as soon as possible."
From Mr. L. E. WILLISTON, Principal Ladies'1 Seminary, Cambridge, Mass.
" I think this work a decided advance upon the Grammar now in use."
From Mr. D. B,. HAGER, Princ. Eliot High School, Jamaica Plain, Mass.
" This is, in my opinion, by far the best Latin Grammar ever published. It is ad-
mirably adapted to the use of learners, being remarkably concise, clear, comprehensive;
and philosophical. It will henceforth be used as a text-book in this school."
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Harkness's Latin Grammar.
From Prof. C. S. HARRINGTON and Prof. J. C. VAN BENSCIIOTEN, of the Wesleyan
University.
" This work is clear, accurate, and happy in its statement of principles, is simple yet
scholarly, and embraces the latest researches in this department of philological science.
It will appear in our catalogue."
From Mr. ELBRIDGE SMITH, Principal Free Academy, Norwich, Ct.
"This is not only the best Latin Grammar, but one of the most thoroughly prepared
school-books that 1 have ever seen. I have introduced the book into the Free Acade-
my, and am much pleased with the results of a month's experience in the class-room.1'
From Mr. II. A. PRATT, Principal High ScJiool, Hartford, Ct.
" I can heartily recommend Harkness's new work to both teachers and scholars. It
is, in my judgment, the best Latin Grammar ever offered to our schools.11
From Mr. I. F. CADY, Principal High ScJiool, Warren, R. 7.
': The longer I use Harkness's Grammar the more fully am I convinced of its superior
excellence. Its merits must secure its adoption wherever it becomes known."
From Messrs. S. TIIURBER and T. B. STOCKWELL, Public High School, Providence.
"An experience of sereral weeks with Harkness's Latin Grammar enables us to say
with confidence, that it is an improvement on our former text-book.11
From Mr. C. B. GOFF, Principal Boys1 Classical High School, Providence, K. I.
" The practical working of Harkness's Grammar is gratifying even beyond my expec-
tations.11
From Rev. Prof. M. II. BUCKHAM, University of Vermont.
" Harkness's Lathi Grammar seems to me to supply the desideratum. It is philo-
sophical in its method, and yet simple and clear in its statements ; and this, in my judg-
ment, is the highest encomium which can be bestowed on a text-book."
From Mr. E. T. QUIMBY, Appleton Academy, New IpswicJi, N. IT.
" I think the book much superior to any other I have seen. I should be glad to in-
troduce it at once.11
From Mr. II. ORCITTT, Glenwood Ladies'1 Seminary, W. Braitleboro' , Vt.
" I am pleased with Harkness's Latin Grammar, and have already introduced it into
this seminary.'1
From Mr. CHARLES JEWETT, Principal of Franklin Academy.
" I deem it an admirable work, and think it will supersede all others now in use ; in
the division and arrangement of topics, and in its mechanical execution, it is superior to
any Latin Grammar extant/'
From Mr. C. C. CHASE, Principal of Lotcell High ScJiool.
" Prof. Harkness's Grammar is, in my opinion, admirably adapted to make the study
•f the Latin language agreeable and interesting."
From Mr. J. KIMBALL, IfigJi School, Dorchester, Mass.
" It meets my ideal of what is desirable in every grammar, to wit : compression of
general principles in terse definitions and ctatemonts, for ready use ; aoid fulness of de-
tail, well arranged for reference."
1). APPLETON tfc CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Harkness's Caesar.
This edition of Caesar's Commentaries, intended to follow the Latin
Reader, aims to introduce the student to an appreciative study of Latin
authors. The text is the result of a careful collation of the several edi-
tions most approved by European scholars. The notes are intended to
guide the faithful efforts of the learner, and to furnish him such collateral
information as will enable him to understand the stirring events recorded
in the Commentaries, and such special aid as will enable him to surmount
real difficulties of construction and idiom. They will thus, it is hoped,
render an acceptable service both to the instructor and the learner, by
lightening the burden of the one, and by promoting the progress of the
other. The dictionary has been prepared with special reference to the
wants of the student.
The Life of Caesar, the Map of Gaul, and the diagrams and illustra-
tions which accompany the notes, will greatly add to the value of the
work.
From Pres. AIKIN, Union College, N. Y.
" This edition of the Commentaries is
admirably suited, not merely to give the
student an acquaintance with his immedi-
ate text-book, but also to develop those
habits of investigation, that thoughtfulness
in regard to the scope of the whole subject,
and that style of vigorous, tasteful, and
idiomatic rendering, which are among the
rarest, as they are certainly among the
most important, results of classical study.1'
From S. H. TAYLOR, LL. D., Phillips
Academy, Andover, Mass.
"The notes are prepared with a judi-
cious appreciation of the wants of the pupil.
They show the hand of the finished scholar,
as well as of the experienced teacher."
From Prof. TV. A. PACKARD, Princeton.
College, N. J.
" The notes are models of what the be-
ginner needs to interest and guide him.
The text is furnished with the best illus-
trations in the way of maps and plans.1'
From Prof. W. T. JOHNSON, Notre-Dame
University* Ind.
"•This is certainly an excellent text-
book—superior to any other edition of the
Commentaries now in use.1'
From Pres. MCELDOWNEY, Albion Col-
lege, Mich.
" This is the most valuable edition of
Cfiosar with which I am acquainted."
From Prof. II. TV. HAYNES, University </
Vermont.
" Never before have I seen snch a lucid
and simple explanation of Caesar's bridge
across the Khine."
From Prof. C. S. HARRINGTON, Wesleyan
Univevsity, Conn.
"The student who uses this edition
must read Caesar with a lively relish."
From Prof. TV. A. STEVENS, Denison Uni-
versity Ohio.
" The notes are gotten up on the right
principle, and are greatly superior to those
of similar works in England."
From Prof. J. E. GINTNER, Otterbein Uni-
versity, Ohio.
" This is the only edition of Caesar rec-
ommended to our classes."
From A.. D. SANDBORN, Wilton Seminar?/,
Iowa.
" I know of no work of the kind rn
which the notes so fully meet the want?
of both teacher and pupil. I am delighted
with the Me of Caesar."
From Prof. S. HASSELL, State Normal
University, Del.
" This edition of Caesar is superior to
all others published in this country. The
biographical sketch of the Eoman com-
mander is a splendid production."
D. APPLETON & CO? 8 PUBLICATIONS.
Arnold's First Latin Book ;
Remodelled and Rewritten, and adapted to the Ollendorff Method of
Instruction. By ALBERT HARKNESS, A. M. 12mo, 302 pages.
Under the labors of the present author, the work of Arnold has undergone radical
changes. It has been adapted to the Ollendorff improved method of instruction, and is
superior to the former work in its plan and all the details of instruction. While it pro-
ceeds hi common with Arnold on the principle of imitation and repetition, it pursues
much more exactly and with a surer step the progressive method, and aims to make the
pupil master of every individual subject before he proceeds to a new one, and of each
subject by itself before it is combined with others ; so that he is brought gradually and
surely to understand the most difficult combinations of the language. An important
feature of this book is, that it carries along the Syntax part passu with the Etymology,
so that the student is not only all the while becoming familiar with the forms of the lan-
guage, but is also learning to construct sentences and to understand the mutual relations
of their component parts.
Special care has been taken in the exercises to present such idioms and expressions
alone as are authorized by the best classic authors, so that the learner may acquire by
example as well as precept, a distinct idea of pure Latinity.
It has been a leading object with the author so to classify and arrange the various
topics as to simplify the subject, and, as far as possible, to remove the disheartening diffi-
culties too often encountered at the outset in the study of an ancient language.
From W. E. TOLMAN, Instructor in, Providence ITigli School.
" I have used Arnold's First Latin Book, remodelled and rewritten by Mr. Ilarkness,
in my classes during the past year, and find it to be a work not so much remodelled and
rewritten as one entirely new, both in its plan and in its adaptation to the wants of the
beginner in Latin."
From WM. EUSSELL, Editor of the First Series of the Boston Journal of Education.
"The form which this work has taken under the skillful hand of Mr. II. is marked
throughout by a method purely elementary, perfectly simple, gradually progressive, and
rigorously exact. Pupils trained on such a manual cannot fail of becoming distinguished,
in their subsequent progress, for precision and correctness of knowledge, and for rapid
advancement in genuine scholarship."
From GEORGE CAPRON, Principal of Worcester High School.
" I have examined the work with care, and am happy to say that I find it superior
to any similar work with which I am acquainted. I shall recommend it to my next
class.1'
From J. E. BOISE, Professor of Ancient Languages in Michigan University.
t; I have examined your First Book in Latin, and am exceedingly pleased both with
tho plan and execution. I shall not fail to use my influence toward introducing it into
the classical schools of this State."
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Second Latin Book.
Comprising an Historical Latin Reader, with Notes and Rules for
Translating, and an Exercise Book, developing a Complete Ana-
lytical Syntax, in a series of Lessons and Exercises, involving
the Construction, Analysis, and Reconstruction of Latin Sen-
tences. By ALBERT HARKNESS, A.M., Senior Master in the
Providence High School. 12mo, 362 pages.
This work is designed as a sequel to the author's " First Latin Book." It comprises
a complete analytical syntax, exhibiting the essential structure of the Latin language,
from its simplest to its most expanded and elaborate form.
The arrangement of the lessons is decidedly philosophical, gradually progressive,
and in strict accordance with the law of development of the human mind. Every new
principle is stated in simple, clear, and accurate language, and illustrated by examples
carefully selected from the reading lessons, which the student is required to translate,
analyze, and reconstruct. He is also exercised in forming new Latin sentences on given
models. This, while it gives variety and interest to what would otherwise be in the
highest degree monotonous, completely fixes in the mind the subject of the lesson, both
by analysis and synthesis.
The careful study of this volume, on the plan recommended by the author, will
greatly facilitate the pupil's progress in the higher departments of the language. Such
is the testimony of the numerous institutions in which Harkness's improved edition*
of Arnold has been introduced.
From J. A. SPENCER, D. D., late Professor of Latin in Burlington College, N. J.
"The present volume 'appears tome to carry out excellently the system on which
the late lamented Arnold based his educational works ; and in the Selections for Bead-
ing, the Notes and Rules for Translating, the Exercises in Translating into Latin, tho
Analyses, etc., I think it admirably adapted to advance the diligent student, not only
rapidly, but soundly, in an acquaintance with the Latin language.111
From PROF. GAMMELL, of Brown University.
" The book seems to me, as I anticipated it would be, a valuable addition to the works
now in use among teachers of Latin in the schools of the United States, and for many
of them it will undoubtedly form an advantageous substitute."
From PROF. LINCOLN, of Brown University.
" It seems to me to carry on most successfully the method pursued in the First
Book. Though brief, it is very comprehensive, and combines judicious and skilfully-
forined exercises with systematic instruction."
From J. J. OWEN, D. D., Professor of the Latin and GreeJt Languages and Litera-
ture in the Free Academy, New York.
"This Second Latin Book gives abundant evidence of the author's learning and
tact to arrange, simplify, and make accessible to the youthful mind the great and funda-
mental principles df the Latin language. The book is worthy of a place in every
classical school, and I trust will have an extensive sale."
From, PROF. ANDERSON, of Lewisburg University, Pennsylvania.
" A faithful use of the work would diminish the drudgery of the student's earlier
studies, and facilitate his progress in his subsequent course. I wish the work a wid*
D. APPL^TON <i> CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Arnold's Latin Course :
I. FIEST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAMMAR. Re-
visedand Carefully Corrected, by J. A. SPENCEK, D. D. 12mo, 859 pa" es
II. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, Re-
vised and carefully corrected by J. A. SPENCEK, D. D. 12mo, 356 pages.
III. CORNELIUS NEPOS. With Questions and Answers, and an Imitative&Exercise
on each Chapter. "With Notes by E. A. JOHNSON, Professor of Latin, in Uni-
versity of New York. New edition, enlarged, with a Lexicon, Historical and
Geographical Index, etc. 12mo, 350 pages.
Arnold's Classical Series has attained a circulation almost unparalleled, having been
introduced into nearly all the leading educational institutions in the United States.
The secret of this success is, that the author has hit upon the true system of teaching
the ancient languages. He exhibits them ifct as dead, but as living tongues ; and by
imitation and repetition, the means which Nature herself points out to the child learn-
ing his mother-tongue, he familiarizes the student with the idioms employed by the
elegant writers and speakers of antiquity.
The First and Second Latin Book should be put into the hands of the beginners, who
will soon acquire from its pages a better idea of the language than could be gained by
months of study according to the old system. The reason of this is, that every thing
has a practical bearing, and a principle is no sooner learned than it is applied. The pupil
is at once set to work on exercises.
The Prose Composition ibrms an excellent sequel to the above work, or may te
used with any other course. It teaches the art of writing Latin more correctly and
thoroughly, more easily and pleasantly, than any other work. In its pages Latin syno.
nymes are carefully illustrated, differences of idioms noted, cautions as to common errors
impressed on the mind, and every help afforded toward attaining a pure and flowing
Latin style.
From N. WHEELER, Principal of Worcester County High School.
" In the skill with which he sets forth the idiomatic peculiarities, as well as in the
directness and symplicity with which he states the facts of the ancient languages, Mr.
Arnold has no superior. I know of no books so admirably adapted to awaken an inter-
est in the study of the language, or so well fitted to lay the foundation of a correct schol-
arship and refined taste."
From A. B. RUSSELL, Oakland High School.
" The style in which the books are got up are not their only recommendation. With
thorough instruction on the part of the teacher using these books as text-books, I am
confident a much more ample return for the time and labor bestowed by our youth upon
' Latin must be secured. The time certainly has come when an advance must be made
upon the old methods of instruction. I am glad to have a work that promises so many
.i .1 vantages as Arnold's First and Second Latin Book to beginners."
From C. M. BLAKE, Classical Teacher, Philadelphia.
" I am much pleased with Arnold's Latin Books. A class of my older boys have just
finished the First and Second Book. They had studied Latin lor a long time before,
but never understood it, they say, as they do now."
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
OCT 111933
to
By
lie
FEB 4 w&
•ok
of
iIES
.one
30N,
.by
yof
38 by
ABDS
>ition
KEN-
,dley's
12mo.
0.
TTLEB,
180 pp.
LrD 21-100m-7/33
STANDARD CLASSICAL WORKS.
Thucydides's History of the Peloponnesian War, according
to the Text of L. DINDOKF, with Notes by JOHN J. OWEN. With
Map. 12mo.
Xtoiophon's Memorabilia of Socrates. With Notes and Intro-
\duction by R. D. C. KOBB!NS, Professor of Language in Middle-
bury Qollege. 12mo. 421 pages.
Anabasis. With Explanatory Notes for the use of
Schools and Colleges. By JAMB»~R. BOISE, Profess^ - of Greek
in the University of Michigan. 12mo. 393 page?
Anabasis. Chiefly according to th'
DORF, with Notes by John J. OWEN.
Map. 12mp.
— f — Cyropsedia, according to th
with Notes by JOHN J. OWEN. 12mr
Sophocles's (Edipus Tyrannus,
Schools/ and Colleges. By How. /
Greek in the University of New Yc/
HEBREW
Gesenins's Hebre- ~a-
rections and
J. CONAN'
nary,
j. Dm-
With
ise of
ior of
Cor-
byT.
«i Semi-
Ine German.
.cises in Syriac
on prepared by
D. APPLETON & CO., 549 & 551 BKOADWAY, N.
PUBLISH UPWARD OP
3OO SCHOOL TEXT-BOOKS,
Including the Departments of English, Latin, Greek, French, Span-
ish, Italian, Hebrew, and Syriac; of which a complete
DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE
Witt be sent, free of postage, to those applying for it.
A single copy for examination, of any of the works marked
thus *, will be transmitted by mail, postage prepaid, to any Teach-
er remitting one-half of its price. Any of the others will be sent
by mail, postage prepaid, upon receipt of full retail price.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11